RIDGID R3121 Technical data

SINAMICS S120
Commissioning Manual · 01/2011
SINAMICS
s
Commissioning Manual
___________________
Preface
Preparation for
1
___________________
commissioning
SINAMICS
S120
Commissioning Manual
Commissioning Manual
Applies to: Firmware version 4.4
(IH1), 01/2011
6SL3097-4AF00-0BP1
2
___________________
Commissioning
3
___________________
Diagnostics
A
___________________
Appendix
Legal information
Legal information
Warning notice system
This manual contains notices you have to observe in order to ensure your personal safety, as well as to prevent
damage to property. The notices referring to your personal safety are highlighted in the manual by a safety alert
symbol, notices referring only to property damage have no safety alert symbol. These notices shown below are
graded according to the degree of danger.
DANGER
indicates that death or severe personal injury will result if proper precautions are not taken.
WARNING
indicates that death or severe personal injury may result if proper precautions are not taken.
CAUTION
with a safety alert symbol, indicates that minor personal injury can result if proper precautions are not taken.
CAUTION
without a safety alert symbol, indicates that property damage can result if proper precautions are not taken.
NOTICE
indicates that an unintended result or situation can occur if the corresponding information is not taken into
account.
If more than one degree of danger is present, the warning notice representing the highest degree of danger will
be used. A notice warning of injury to persons with a safety alert symbol may also include a warning relating to
property damage.
Qualified Personnel
The product/system described in this documentation may be operated only by personnel qualified for the specific
task in accordance with the relevant documentation for the specific task, in particular its warning notices and
safety instructions. Qualified personnel are those who, based on their training and experience, are capable of
identifying risks and avoiding potential hazards when working with these products/systems.
Proper use of Siemens products
Note the following:
WARNING
Siemens products may only be used for the applications described in the catalog and in the relevant technical
documentation. If products and components from other manufacturers are used, these must be recommended
or approved by Siemens. Proper transport, storage, installation, assembly, commissioning, operation and
maintenance are required to ensure that the products operate safely and without any problems. The permissible
ambient conditions must be adhered to. The information in the relevant documentation must be observed.
Trademarks
All names identified by ® are registered trademarks of the Siemens AG. The remaining trademarks in this
publication may be trademarks whose use by third parties for their own purposes could violate the rights of the
owner.
Disclaimer of Liability
We have reviewed the contents of this publication to ensure consistency with the hardware and software
described. Since variance cannot be precluded entirely, we cannot guarantee full consistency. However, the
information in this publication is reviewed regularly and any necessary corrections are included in subsequent
editions.
Siemens AG
Industry Sector
Postfach 48 48
90026 NÜRNBERG
GERMANY
order number: 6SL3097-4AF00-0BP1
Ⓟ 01/2011
Copyright © Siemens AG 2007,
2008, 2009, 2011.
Technical data subject to change
Preface
SINAMICS documentation
The SINAMICS documentation is organized in the following categories:
● General documentation/catalogs
● User documentation
● Manufacturer/service documentation
More information
The following link provides information on the topics:
● Ordering documentation/overview of documentation
● Additional links to download documents
● Using documentation online (find and search in manuals/information)
http://www.siemens.com/motioncontrol/docu
Please send any questions about the technical documentation (e.g. suggestions for
improvement, corrections) to the following e-mail address:
docu.motioncontrol@siemens.com
My Documentation Manager
The following link provides information on how to create your own individual documentation
based on Siemens' content, and adapt it for your own machine documentation:
http://www.siemens.com/mdm
Training
The following link provides information on SITRAIN - training from Siemens for products,
systems and automation engineering solutions:
http://www.siemens.com/sitrain
FAQs
You can find Frequently Asked Questions in the Service&Support pages under Product
Support.
http://support.automation.siemens.com
SINAMICS
You can find information on SINAMICS at:
http://www.siemens.com/sinamics.
Commissioning Manual
Commissioning Manual, (IH1), 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AF00-0BP1
3
Preface
Usage phases and their tools/documents (as an example)
Table 1
Usage phases and the available documents/tools
Usage phase
Document/tool
Orientation
SINAMICS S Sales Documentation
Planning/configuration

SIZER Configuration Tool

Configuration Manuals, Motors
Deciding/ordering
SINAMICS S Catalogs
Installation/assembly

SINAMICS S120 Equipment Manual for Control Units and
Additional System Components

SINAMICS S120 Equipment Manual for Booksize Power
Units

SINAMICS S120 Equipment Manual for Chassis Power
Units

SINAMICS S120 Equipment Manual for AC Drives

STARTER commissioning tool

SINAMICS S120 Getting Started

SINAMICS S120 Commissioning Manual

SINAMICS S120 CANopen Commissioning Manual

SINAMICS S120 Function Manual

SINAMICS S120/S150 List Manual

SINAMICS S120 Commissioning Manual

SINAMICS S120/S150 List Manual

SINAMICS S120 Commissioning Manual

SINAMICS S120/S150 List Manual

SINAMICS S120/S150 List Manual
Commissioning
Usage/operation
Maintenance/servicing
References
Target group
This documentation is intended for machine manufacturers, commissioning engineers, and
service personnel who use the SINAMICS drive system.
Benefits
This Manual describes all the information, procedures and operational instructions required
for commissioning and servicing SINAMICS S120.
Commissioning Manual
4
Commissioning Manual, (IH1), 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AF00-0BP1
Preface
Standard scope
The scope of the functionality described in this document may differ from the scope of the
functionality of the drive system that is actually supplied.
● It may be possible for other functions not described in this documentation to be executed
in the drive system. However, no claim can be made regarding the availability of these
functions when the equipment is first supplied or in the event of servicing.
● Functions that are not available in a particular product version of the drive system may be
described in the documentation. The functionality of the supplied drive system should
only be taken from the ordering documentation.
● Extensions or changes made by the machine manufacturer must be documented by the
machine manufacturer.
For reasons of clarity, this documentation does not contain all of the detailed information on
all of the product types. This documentation cannot take into consideration every
conceivable type of installation, operation and service/maintenance.
Technical Support
Country-specific telephone numbers for technical support are provided in the Internet under
Contact:
http://www.siemens.com/automation/service&support
EC Declaration of Conformity
The EC Declaration of Conformity for the EMC Directive can be found on the Internet at:
http://support.automation.siemens.com
There – as a search term – enter the number 15257461 or contact your local Siemens office.
Notation
The following notation and abbreviations are used in this documentation:
Notation for parameters (examples):
● p0918 Adjustable parameter 918
● r1024 Visualization parameter 1024
● p1070[1] Adjustable parameter 1070, index 1
● p2098[1].3 Adjustable parameter 2098, index 1, bit 3
● p0099[0...3] Adjustable parameter 99, indices 0 to 3
● r0945[2](3) Visualization parameter 945, index 2 of drive object 3
● p0795.4 Adjustable parameter 795, bit 4
Notation for faults and alarms (examples):
● F12345 Fault 12345
● A67890 Alarm 67890
Commissioning Manual
Commissioning Manual, (IH1), 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AF00-0BP1
5
Preface
ESD Notes
CAUTION
Electrostatic sensitive devices (ESD) are single components, integrated circuits or devices
that can be damaged by electrostatic fields or electrostatic discharges.
Regulations for the ESD handling:
During the handling of electronic components, pay attention to the grounding of the person,
workplace and packaging!
Electronic components may be touched by persons only when
 these persons are grounded using an ESD bracelet, or
 these persons in ESD areas with a conducting floor wear ESD shoes or ESD grounding
straps.
Electronic components should be touched only when this is unavoidable. The touching is
permitted only on the front panel or on the circuit board edge.
Electronic components must not be brought into contact with plastics or clothing made of
artificial fibers.
Electronic components may only be placed on conducting surfaces (table with ESD coating,
conducting ESD foamed material, ESD packing bag, ESD transport container).
Electronic components may not be placed near display units, monitors or televisions
(minimum distance from the screen > 10 cm).
Measurements must only be taken on boards when the measuring instrument is grounded
(via protective conductors, for example) or the measuring probe is briefly discharged before
measurements are taken with an isolated measuring device (for example, touching a bare
metal housing).
Commissioning Manual
6
Commissioning Manual, (IH1), 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AF00-0BP1
Preface
Safety notices
DANGER
 Commissioning is absolutely prohibited until it has been completely ensured that the
machine, in which the components described here are to be installed, is in full
compliance with the provisions of the EC Machinery Directive.
 SINAMICS devices and AC motors may only be commissioned by suitably qualified
personnel.
 The personnel must take into account the information provided in the technical customer
documentation for the product, and be familiar with and observe the specified danger
and warning notices.
 When electrical equipment and motors are operated, the electrical circuits automatically
conduct a dangerous voltage.
 Dangerous mechanical movements are possible during system operations.
 All the work carried out on the electrical machine or system must be carried out with it in
a no-voltage condition.
 SINAMICS devices with three-phase motors must only be connected to the power
supply via a universal current-sensitive residual current operated device with selective
switching once it has been verified that the SINAMICS device is compatible with the
residual current operated device in accordance with IEC 61800-5-1.
WARNING
 The successful and safe operation of this equipment and motors is dependent on
professional transport, storage, installation and mounting as well as careful operations ,
service and maintenance.
 Information and data from the catalogs and quotations also apply to special versions of
the equipment and motors.
 In addition to the danger and warning information provided in the technical customer
documentation, the applicable national, local, and plant-specific regulations and
requirements must be taken into account.
 Only protective extra-low voltages (PELV) that comply with EN60204-1 may be
connected to all connections and terminals between 0 and 48 V.
Commissioning Manual
Commissioning Manual, (IH1), 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AF00-0BP1
7
Preface
CAUTION
 The motors can have surface temperatures of over +80 °C.
 This is why temperature-sensitive components, e.g. cables or electronic components
must not be in contact with or attached to the motor.
 When connecting up cables, please ensure that they
– are not damaged
– are not subject to tensile stress
– cannot be touched by rotating components.
CAUTION
 As part of routine tests, SINAMICS devices with three-phase motors undergo a voltage
test in accordance with IEC 61800. Before the voltage test is performed on the electrical
equipment of industrial machines to EN 60204-1, Section 18.4, all connectors of
SINAMICS devices must be disconnected/withdrawn to prevent the equipment from
being damaged.
 Motors should be connected up according to the circuit diagram provided otherwise they
may be destroyed.
CAUTION
Terminals for pulse inhibit (EP terminals)
The Safe Torque Off (STO) safety function must be parameterized in order to use the pulse
inhibit terminals at the Motor Modules, booksize, booksize compact, chassis and Cabinet
Modules and at the Power Modules, chassis and blocksize. (Safety Integrated Basic
Functions or Extended Functions)
Here, the procedure is described in the FHS and FH1 Function Manuals.
Note
When operated in dry areas, SINAMICS devices with three-phase motors conform to LowVoltage Directive 2006/95/EC.
Commissioning Manual
8
Commissioning Manual, (IH1), 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AF00-0BP1
Contents
Preface ...................................................................................................................................................... 3
1
2
Preparation for commissioning ................................................................................................................ 13
1.1
Requirements for commissioning.................................................................................................13
1.2
Check lists to commission SINAMICS S......................................................................................15
1.3
PROFIBUS components ..............................................................................................................18
1.4
PROFINET components ..............................................................................................................18
1.5
1.5.1
1.5.2
1.5.3
1.5.4
1.5.5
1.5.6
1.5.7
1.5.8
1.5.9
1.5.10
1.5.10.1
1.5.10.2
1.5.10.3
Rules for wiring with DRIVE-CLiQ ...............................................................................................20
Binding DRIVE-CLiQ rules...........................................................................................................20
Recommended DRIVE-CLiQ rules ..............................................................................................25
Wiring example for drives in vector control mode........................................................................29
Wiring example for parallel connection of Motor Modules in vector control mode ......................31
Sample wiring: Power Modules....................................................................................................32
Changing the offline topology in STARTER.................................................................................34
Offline correction of the reference topology.................................................................................35
Sample wiring for servo drives.....................................................................................................38
Sample wiring for vector V/f drives ..............................................................................................39
Notes on the number of controllable drives .................................................................................39
System sampling times and number of controllable drives .........................................................40
Optimizing DRIVE-CLiQ...............................................................................................................44
Default settings for the sampling times........................................................................................45
1.6
Powering-up/powering-down the drive system ............................................................................46
Commissioning ........................................................................................................................................ 51
2.1
2.1.1
Procedure when commissioning ..................................................................................................51
Safety guidelines..........................................................................................................................52
2.2
2.2.1
2.2.2
2.2.3
2.2.4
STARTER commissioning tool.....................................................................................................53
Important STARTER functions.....................................................................................................53
Activating online operation: STARTER via PROFIBUS...............................................................55
Activating online operation: STARTER via Ethernet....................................................................56
Activating online operation: STARTER via PROFINET IO ..........................................................60
2.3
2.3.1
2.3.1.1
2.3.1.2
2.3.1.3
2.3.1.4
2.3.2
Basic Operator Panel 20 (BOP20)...............................................................................................65
Operation with BOP20 (Basic Operator Panel 20) ......................................................................65
General information about the BOP20.........................................................................................65
Displays and using the BOP20 ....................................................................................................70
Fault and alarm displays ..............................................................................................................75
Controlling the drive using the BOP20.........................................................................................76
Important functions via BOP20 ....................................................................................................77
2.4
2.4.1
2.4.2
Creating a project in STARTER ...................................................................................................78
Creating a project offline ..............................................................................................................78
Searching for a drive unit online ..................................................................................................80
2.5
First commissioning, servo control mode, booksize format.........................................................82
Commissioning Manual
Commissioning Manual, (IH1), 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AF00-0BP1
9
Contents
3
2.5.1
2.5.2
2.5.3
2.5.4
Task............................................................................................................................................. 83
Component wiring (example) ...................................................................................................... 84
Signal flow of the commissioning example ................................................................................. 85
Commissioning with STARTER (example) ................................................................................. 86
2.6
2.6.1
2.6.2
2.6.3
2.6.4
First commissioning control mode vector U/f in booksize format................................................ 89
Task............................................................................................................................................. 89
Component wiring (example) ...................................................................................................... 90
Signal flow of the commissioning example ................................................................................. 91
Commissioning with STARTER (example) ................................................................................. 92
2.7
2.7.1
2.7.2
2.7.3
2.7.4
First commissioning, vector control mode in the chassis format ................................................ 96
Task............................................................................................................................................. 97
Component wiring (example) ...................................................................................................... 98
Signal flow of the commissioning example ................................................................................. 99
Commissioning with STARTER (example) ............................................................................... 100
2.8
2.8.1
2.8.2
2.8.3
First commissioning, control mode vector AC Drive in the booksize format............................. 105
Task........................................................................................................................................... 105
Component wiring (example) .................................................................................................... 106
Quick commissioning using the BOP (example)....................................................................... 107
2.9
2.9.1
2.9.2
2.9.3
2.9.4
First commissioning, control mode servo AC Drive in the booksize format.............................. 110
Initial commissioning using servo (booksize) as an example_lead text.................................... 110
Task........................................................................................................................................... 110
Component wiring (example) .................................................................................................... 111
Quick commissioning using the BOP (example)....................................................................... 112
2.10
Commissioning of power units connected in parallel................................................................ 114
2.11
Learn devices............................................................................................................................ 119
2.12
Selection and configuration of encoders................................................................................... 120
2.13
2.13.1
2.13.2
2.13.3
2.13.4
2.13.5
2.13.6
Commissioning linear motors (servo) ....................................................................................... 130
General information on commissioning linear motors............................................................... 130
Commissioning: Linear motor with one primary section ........................................................... 133
Commissioning: Linear motor with several identical primary sections ..................................... 137
Thermal motor protection .......................................................................................................... 138
Measuring system ..................................................................................................................... 141
Checking the linear motor by taking measurements................................................................. 144
2.14
Notes on commissioning SSI encoders .................................................................................... 146
2.15
Notes on the commissioning of a 2-pole resolver as absolute encoder ................................... 150
2.16
Temperature sensors for SINAMICS components ................................................................... 151
Diagnostics ............................................................................................................................................ 159
3.1
3.1.1
3.1.1.1
3.1.1.2
3.1.1.3
3.1.1.4
3.1.1.5
3.1.1.6
3.1.1.7
Diagnostics via LEDs ................................................................................................................ 159
Control Units ............................................................................................................................. 159
Description of the LED states of a CU 320-2 ............................................................................ 159
Control Unit 320-2DP during booting ........................................................................................ 160
Control Unit 320-2DP in operation ............................................................................................ 161
Control Unit 320-2PN while booting.......................................................................................... 163
Control Unit 320-2PN in operation ............................................................................................ 164
Description of the LED states of a CU 310-2 ............................................................................ 166
Control Unit 310-2DP during booting ........................................................................................ 167
Commissioning Manual
10
Commissioning Manual, (IH1), 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AF00-0BP1
Contents
3.1.1.8
3.1.1.9
3.1.1.10
3.1.2
3.1.2.1
3.1.2.2
3.1.2.3
3.1.2.4
3.1.2.5
3.1.2.6
3.1.2.7
3.1.2.8
3.1.2.9
3.1.2.10
3.1.2.11
3.1.2.12
3.1.2.13
3.1.2.14
3.1.2.15
3.1.2.16
3.1.2.17
3.1.2.18
3.1.3
3.1.3.1
3.1.3.2
3.1.3.3
3.1.3.4
3.1.3.5
3.1.3.6
3.1.3.7
3.1.3.8
3.1.3.9
3.1.4
3.1.4.1
3.1.4.2
3.1.4.3
3.1.4.4
3.1.4.5
Control Unit 310-2DP in operation.............................................................................................168
Control Unit 310-2PN while booting...........................................................................................169
Control Unit 310-2PN in operation.............................................................................................170
Power units ................................................................................................................................171
Active Line Module booksize .....................................................................................................171
Basic Line Module booksize ......................................................................................................172
Smart Line Modules booksize 5 kW and 10 kW ........................................................................173
Smart Line Modules booksize 16 kW to 55 kW .........................................................................174
Single Motor Module / Double Motor Module / Power Module ..................................................175
Braking Modules booksize format..............................................................................................176
Smart Line Module booksize compact format............................................................................176
Motor Module booksize compact format....................................................................................178
Control Interface Module in the Active Line Module chassis format..........................................179
Control Interface Board in the Active Line Module chassis format ............................................180
Control Interface Module in the Basic Line Module chassis format...........................................181
Control Interface Board in the Basic Line Module chassis format .............................................182
Control Interface Module in the Smart Line Module chassis format ..........................................183
Control Interface Board in the Smart Line Module chassis format ............................................184
Control Interface Module in the Motor Module chassis format ..................................................185
Control Interface Board in the Motor Module chassis format ....................................................186
Control Interface Module in the Power Module chassis format .................................................187
Control Interface Board in the Power Module chassis format ...................................................188
Additional modules.....................................................................................................................189
Control Supply Module...............................................................................................................189
Meaning of the LEDs on the Control Interface Module in the Power Module............................190
Meaning of the LEDs on the Control Interface Board in the Power Module..............................191
Sensor Module Cabinet SMC10 / SMC20 .................................................................................192
Meaning of LEDs on the Sensor Module Cabinet-Mounted SMC30 .........................................193
Communication Board CBC10 for CANopen.............................................................................194
Communication Board Ethernet CBE20 ....................................................................................195
Voltage Sensing Module VSM10 ...............................................................................................197
DRIVE-CLiQ Hub Module DMC20 .............................................................................................198
Terminal Module ........................................................................................................................199
Terminal Module TM15 ..............................................................................................................199
Terminal Module TM31 ..............................................................................................................200
Terminal Module TM41 ..............................................................................................................201
Terminal Module TM54F............................................................................................................202
Terminal Module TM120 ............................................................................................................204
3.2
3.2.1
3.2.2
3.2.3
3.2.4
Diagnostics via STARTER .........................................................................................................205
Function generator.....................................................................................................................205
Trace function ............................................................................................................................209
Measuring function.....................................................................................................................211
Measuring sockets .....................................................................................................................213
3.3
Diagnostic buffer ........................................................................................................................217
3.4
Diagnostics of uncommissioned axes........................................................................................221
3.5
3.5.1
3.5.2
3.5.3
3.5.4
Fault and alarm messages.........................................................................................................224
General information about faults and alarms.............................................................................224
Buffer for faults and alarms........................................................................................................226
Configuring messages ...............................................................................................................230
Parameters and function diagrams for faults and alarms ..........................................................232
Commissioning Manual
Commissioning Manual, (IH1), 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AF00-0BP1
11
Contents
A
3.5.5
3.5.6
Forwarding of faults................................................................................................................... 233
Alarm classes............................................................................................................................ 234
3.6
Troubleshooting for encoders ................................................................................................... 235
Appendix................................................................................................................................................ 239
A.1
Availability of hardware components ........................................................................................ 239
A.2
List of abbreviations .................................................................................................................. 242
Index...................................................................................................................................................... 253
Commissioning Manual
12
Commissioning Manual, (IH1), 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AF00-0BP1
Preparation for commissioning
1
Before commissioning observe the conditions described in this chapter.
● The preconditions for commissioning must be fulfilled (in the next chapter).
● The relevant checklist must have been worked through.
● The bus components required for communication must be wired up.
● DRIVE-CliQ wiring rules must be adhered to.
● ON-OFF responses of the drive
1.1
Requirements for commissioning
The following are necessary for commissioning a SINAMICS S drive system:
● STARTER commissioning tool
● An interface, e.g. PROFIBUS, PROFINET, CAN bus or USS (RS232-C)
● Completely wired-up drive line-up (see the Manual)
The following diagram shows a sample configuration with booksize and chassis components.
Commissioning Manual
Commissioning Manual, (IH1), 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AF00-0BP1
13
Preparation for commissioning
1.1 Requirements for commissioning
;
;
&RQWURO
8QLW
;
$FWLYH
/LQH
0RGXOH
6LQJOH
0RWRU
0RGXOH
;
3&3*
;
60&
;
352),%86
;
&RQWURO
8QLW
;
$FWLYH
,QWHUIDFH
0RGXOH
;;
$FWLYH
/LQH
0RGXOH
;
6LQJOH
0RWRU
0RGXOH
3&3*
;
352),%86
Figure 1-1
Component configuration (example)
Commissioning Manual
14
Commissioning Manual, (IH1), 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AF00-0BP1
Preparation for commissioning
1.2 Check lists to commission SINAMICS S
1.2
Check lists to commission SINAMICS S
Checklist (1) for commissioning booksize power units
The following checklist must be carefully observed. Read the safety instructions in the
Manuals before starting any work.
Table 1- 1
Checklist for commissioning (booksize)
Check
OK
Are the environmental conditions in the permissible range?
Is the component firmly attached to the fixing points provided?
Is the specified air flow for cooling the devices ensured?
Have the ventilation clearances for the components been observed?
Is the memory card correctly inserted in the Control Unit?
Are all of the necessary components of the configured drive line-up available, installed
and connected?
Do the temperature monitoring circuits fulfill the specifications of protective
separation?
Have the DRIVE-CLiQ topology rules been observed?
Have the line-side and motor-side power cables been dimensioned and routed in
accordance with the environmental and routing conditions?
Have the maximum permissible cable lengths between the frequency converter and
the motor (depending on the type of cables used) been observed?
Have the power cables been properly connected to the component terminals with the
specified torque?
Have all of the remaining screws been tightened to the specified torque?
Has all wiring work been successfully completed?
Are all connectors correctly plugged in and screwed in place?
Have all the covers for the DC link been closed and latched into place?
Have the screens been correctly connected through a large surface area?
Commissioning Manual
Commissioning Manual, (IH1), 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AF00-0BP1
15
Preparation for commissioning
1.2 Check lists to commission SINAMICS S
Checklist (2) for commissioning chassis power units
The following checklist must be carefully observed. Read the safety instructions in the
Manuals before starting any work.
Table 1- 2
Checklist for commissioning (chassis)
Activity
OK
Are the environmental conditions in the permissible range?
Are the components correctly installed in the cabinets?
Is the specified air flow for cooling the devices ensured?
Is an air short-circuit between the air inlet and outlet for the chassis components
prevented by the installation arrangements?
Have the ventilation clearances for the components been observed?
Is the memory card correctly inserted in the Control Unit?
Are all of the necessary components of the configured drive line-up available, installed
and connected?
Do the temperature monitoring circuits fulfill the specifications of protective
separation?
Have the DRIVE-CLiQ topology rules been observed?
Have the line-side and motor-side power cables been dimensioned and routed in
accordance with the environmental and routing conditions?
Have the maximum permissible cable lengths between the frequency converter and
the motor (depending on the type of cables used) been observed?
Is the ground for the motors directly connected to the ground for the Motor Modules
(shortest distance)?
Are the motors connected with shielded power cables?
Are the power cable shields connected as closely as possible to the terminal box
across a wide area?
Have the power cables been properly connected to the component terminals with the
specified torque?
Have all of the remaining screws been tightened to the specified torque?
Has the total power of the DC busbar been dimensioned sufficiently?
Has the busbar/wiring for the DC connection between the infeed and the Motor
Modules been dimensioned sufficiently with regard to the load and installation
conditions?
Are the cables between the low-voltage switchgear and the power unit protected with
line fuses? Line protection(1) should be taken into account.
Have measures been taken to relieve strain on the cables?
For external auxiliary infeed: Have the cables for the auxiliary infeed been connected
according to the Equipment Manual?
Have the control cables been connected in accordance with the required interface
configuration and the shield applied?
Have the digital and analog signals been routed with separate cables?
Has the distance from power cables been observed?
Has the cabinet been properly grounded at the points provided?
Has the connection voltage for the fans in the chassis components been adapted
accordingly to the supply voltages?
Commissioning Manual
16
Commissioning Manual, (IH1), 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AF00-0BP1
Preparation for commissioning
1.2 Check lists to commission SINAMICS S
Activity
OK
For operation on non-grounded supply systems: Has the connection bracket for the
interference suppression at the Infeed Module or the Power Module been removed?
Is the period from the date of manufacture to initial commissioning or the downtime of
the power components less than two years(2)?
Is the drive operated by higher-level controller/control room?
Checklist (3) for commissioning blocksize Power Modules
The following checklist must be carefully observed. Read the safety instructions in the
Manuals before starting any work.
Table 1- 3
Check list for commissioning blocksize
Check
OK
Are the environmental conditions in the permissible range?
Is the component firmly attached to the fixing points provided?
Is the specified air flow for cooling the devices ensured?
Have the ventilation clearances for the components been observed?
Is the memory card correctly inserted in the Control Unit?
Are all of the necessary components of the configured drive line-up available, installed
and connected?
Do the temperature monitoring circuits fulfill the specifications of protective
separation?
Have the line-side and motor-side power cables been dimensioned and routed in
accordance with the environmental and routing conditions?
Have the maximum permissible cable lengths between the frequency converter and
the motor (depending on the type of cables used) been observed?
Have the power cables been properly connected to the component terminals with the
specified torque?
Have all of the remaining screws been tightened to the specified torque?
Has all wiring work been successfully completed?
Are all connectors correctly plugged in and screwed in place?
Have the screens been correctly connected through a large surface area?
Combined fuses are recommended for conductor and semi-conductor protection
(VDE 636, Part 10 and Part 40 / EN 60269-4). For information about the relevant fuses, see
the catalog.
(1)
(2)If
the downtime period is longer than two years, the DC link capacitors must be reformed
(see the "Maintenance and Servicing" chapter in the Equipment Manual). If the device has
been non-operational for less than two years, reforming is not necessary. The cabinet rating
plate can be used to ascertain the date of manufacture.
Commissioning Manual
Commissioning Manual, (IH1), 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AF00-0BP1
17
Preparation for commissioning
1.3 PROFIBUS components
1.3
PROFIBUS components
For communication via PROFIBUS, components with a PROFIBUS interface are required.
● A communication module for programming device/PC connection via the PROFIBUS
interface:
● PROFIBUS connection to a programming device/PC via USB port (USB V2.0), e.g. with
the PROFIBUS adapter CP5711.
Structure: USB port (USB V2.0) + adapter with 9-pin SUB-D socket connector to connect
to PROFIBUS.
Used with driver SIMATIC Net PC Software Edition 2008 + SP2
Order No.: 6GK1571-1AA00
Connecting cable
Connecting cable between PROFIBUS adapter and programming device/PC, such as
● Between CP 5xxx and PROFIBUS, Order No.: 6ES7901-4BD00-0XA0
● MPI cable (SIMATIC S7), Order No.: 6ES7901-0BF00-0AA0
Cable lengths
Table 1- 4
Permissible PROFIBUS cable lengths
Baud rate [bit/s]
1.4
Max. cable length [m]
9.6 k to 187.5 k
1000
500 k
400
1.5 M
200
3 to 12 M
100
PROFINET components
For communication via PROFINET, components with a PROFINET interface are required:
1. A communication module for programming device/PC connection via the PROFINET
interface.
Commissioning Manual
18
Commissioning Manual, (IH1), 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AF00-0BP1
Preparation for commissioning
1.4 PROFINET components
Note
For commissioning with STARTER, the onboard Ethernet interface of the Control Unit can
be used with a crossover cable from CAT5 and higher.
The PROFINET module CBE20 supports all standard Ethernet cables and crossover
cables from CAT5/5e and higher.
2. Connecting cable
Connecting cable between PROFINET adapter and programming device/PC, such as
– Industrial Ethernet FC TP Standard Cable GP 2 x 2 (up to max. 100 m)
Standard bus cable with rigid conductors and a special design for fast installation
Order No.: 6XV1840-2AH10
– Industrial Ethernet FC TP Flexible Cable GP 2 x 2 (up to max. 85 m)
Order No.: 6XV1870–2B
– Industrial Ethernet FC Trailing Cable GP 2 x 2 (up to max. 85 m)
Order No.: 6XV1870–2D
– Industrial Ethernet FC Trailing Cable 2 x 2 (up to max. 85 m)
Order No.: 6XV1840–3AH10
– Industrial Ethernet FC Marine Cable 2 x 2 (up to max. 85 m)
Order No.: 6XV1840–4AH10
3. Connector
Connector between PROFINET adapter and PG/PC, such as
– Industrial Ethernet FC RJ45 Plug 145 for Control Unit
Order No.: 6GK1901-1BB30-0Ax0
Commissioning Manual
Commissioning Manual, (IH1), 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AF00-0BP1
19
Preparation for commissioning
1.5 Rules for wiring with DRIVE-CLiQ
1.5
Rules for wiring with DRIVE-CLiQ
Rules apply for wiring components with DRIVE-CLiQ. A distinction is made between binding
DRIVE-CLiQ rules, which must be unconditionally observed and recommended rules,
whichshould then be maintained so that the topology, generated offline in STARTER, no
longer has to be changed.
The maximum number of DRIVE-CLiQ components and the possible wiring type depend on
the following factors:
● The binding DRIVE-CLiQ wiring rules
● The number and type of activated drives and functions on the Control Unit in question
● The computing power of the Control Unit in question
● The set processing and communication cycles
Below you will find the binding wiring rules and some other recommendations as well as a
few sample topologies for DRIVE-CLiQ wiring.
The components used in these examples can be removed, replaced with others or
supplemented. If components are replaced by another type or additional components are
added, the SIZER tool should be used to check the topology.
If the actual topology does not match the topology created offline by STARTER, the offline
topology must be changed accordingly before it is downloaded.
1.5.1
Binding DRIVE-CLiQ rules
DRIVE-CLiQ rules
The wiring rules below apply to standard cycle times (servo 125 µs, vector 250 µs). For cycle
times that are shorter than the corresponding standard cycle times, additional restrictions
apply due to the computing power of the Control Unit (configured using the SIZER
configuration tool).
General DRIVE-CLiQ rules
The following general binding DRIVE-CLiQ rules must be observed to ensure safe operation
of the drive.
1. A maximum of 14 DRIVE-CLiQ nodes can be connected to one DRIVE-CLiQ line at a
Control Unit (e. g. 12 U/f axes + Infeed Module + 1 additional module). In the example
below, the DRIVE-CLiQ line includes drive objects 1 to 14.
2. It is permissible to connect a maximum total of 8 Motor Modules to the Control Unit. For
multi-axis modules, each axis counts individually (1 Double Motor Module = 2 Motor
Modules). Exception: For U/f control it is permissible to connect a maximum of 12 Motor
Modules.
3. With vector U/f control, it is only permissible to connect more than 4 participants to one
DRIVE-CLiQ line of the Control Unit.
4. Ring wiring of components is not permitted.
Commissioning Manual
20
Commissioning Manual, (IH1), 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AF00-0BP1
Preparation for commissioning
1.5 Rules for wiring with DRIVE-CLiQ
5. Double wiring of components is not permitted.
&RQWURO
8QLW
;
;
;
;
1R
GRXEOHZLULQJ
Figure 1-2
1R
ULQJZLULQJ
Example: DRIVE-CLiQ line connected to the X103 DRIVE-CLiQ connection of a
Control Unit
6. DRIVE-CLiQ components of unknown type within a topology are functionally not
supported. The DRIVE-CLiQ signals are looped through.
The following criteria denote the unknown type:
– Characteristics of the component are not available.
– A deputy drive object is not defined.
– An assignment of the component to a known drive object is not defined.
7. In a DRIVE-CLiQ topology with a CU link and DRIVE-CLiQ connections, precisely one
Control Unit is permissible as a CU link master/DRIVE-CLiQ master.
8. If a CU link connection is detected, the DRIVE-CLiQ basic clock cycle 0 (r0110[0]) is set
to 125 μs and assigned to this DRIVE-CLiQ socket.
9. The following applies for booksize format:
– In the servo control and vector U/f control operating modes, only one Line Module may
be connected to the Control Unit. In the vector control operating mode, a maximum of
three further Line Modules may be connected in parallel (i.e. at total of 4 Line
Modules).
– One Line Module and Motor Modules can be connected to one DRIVE-CLiQ line in the
servo control mode.
– One Line Module and Motor Modules must be connected to separate DRIVE-CLiQ
lines in the vector control mode.
– For booksize format, a parallel connection of Infeed Modules or Motor Modules is not
possible.
10.The following applies for chassis format:
– Line Modules (Active Line, Basic Line, Smart Line) and Motor Modules must be
connected to separate DRIVE-CLiQ lines.
– Motor Modules with different pulse frequencies (frame sizes FX, GX, HX, JX) must be
connected to separate DRIVE-CLiQ lines.
Commissioning Manual
Commissioning Manual, (IH1), 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AF00-0BP1
21
Preparation for commissioning
1.5 Rules for wiring with DRIVE-CLiQ
11.Parallel operation of power units in chassis format:
– A parallel connection of power units is permissible for vector control and U/f control
but not for servo control.
– A maximum of 4 Infeed Modules are permissible within a parallel connection.
– A maximum of 4 Motor Modules are permissible within a parallel connection.
– Only just one parallel connection of Motor Modules is permissible. For a parallel
connection, exactly one drive object ("Servo" or "Vector") is created in the topology.
12.For parallel connection of Motor Modules, only one SINAMICS Sensor Module Integrated
(SMI) is permitted for each Motor Module.
13.Switchover between different motors is not permitted for a parallel connection.
14.Mixed operation of Infeed Modules or Motor Modules:
– The operation of Infeed Modules or Motor Modules with different performance values
is not permitted within a parallel connection.
– For Line Modules in chassis format, two parallel connections are permissible for mixed
operation of Smart Line Modules and Basic Line Modules.
– The following combinations of Line Modules are not permissible:
Active Line Module (ALM) with Basic Line Module (BLM)
Active Line Module (ALM) with Smart Line Module (SLM)
15.Mixed operation of formats:
– Chassis Motor Modules and booksize Motor Modules must be connected to separate
DRIVE-CLiQ lines.
16.Mixed operation of control types:
– Mixed operation of servo control and vector control is not permissible.
– Mixed operation of servo control and U/f control is permissible.
– Mixed operation of vector control and U/f control is permissible.
17.Mixed operation of control cycles:
The following combinations are permissible:
– Servo with 62.5 µs and servo with 125 µs
– Servo with 125 µs and servo with 250 µs
– Vector with 250 µs and vector with 500 µs
18.Operation with Voltage Sensing Module (VSM):
– Exactly 1 Voltage Sensing Module (VSM) may be connected to one Line Module.
Exception: If the "Transformer" function module is activated, a second VSM may be
connected.
– A maximum of 2 VSMs may be connected to one Motor Module.
– The VSM must be connected to a free DRIVE-CLiQ socket of the associated Line
Modules/Motor Modules (to support automatic assignment of the VSM).
Commissioning Manual
22
Commissioning Manual, (IH1), 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AF00-0BP1
Preparation for commissioning
1.5 Rules for wiring with DRIVE-CLiQ
19.At a "SERVO" or "VECTOR" drive object, the number of connected encoders must be
equal to the number of parameterized encoder data sets (p0140). A maximum of three
encoders are permissible per drive object.
Exception:
– For a maximum quantity structure of 6 axes in servo control with a controller cycle of
125 μs and one Line Module, a maximum of 9 encoders can be connected.
– For 5 axes in servo control with a controller cycle of 125 μs, a maximum of 15
encoders can be connected.
20.A maximum of up to 24 drive objects can be connected.
21.A maximum of 16 Terminal Modules can be connected to the CU320-2.
Note: If a TM15 Base, TM31, TM54F or a TM41 is connected, it is necessary to reduce
the number of connected standard axes.
22.Cycle times with TM31
A maximum of 3 Terminal Modules 31 (TM31) can be connected for a 2 ms time slice.
Note
A Double Motor Module, one DMC20, one DME20, one TM54F and one CUA32 each
correspond to two DRIVE-CLiQ participants. This also applies to Double Motor Modules,
at which just one drive is configured.
23.The communication basic clock cycles (p0115[0] and p4099) of all components that are
connected to a DRIVE-CLiQ line must be divisible by one another with an integer result.
– The smallest communication basic clock cycle is 125 µs.
– The exception are a maximum of 3 servo-controlled axes with 62.5 µs communication
basic clock cycle or a servo-controlled axis with 31.25 µs communication basic clock
cycle.
24.For current controller clock cycles Ti < 125 μs, the Motor Modules - also with the same
controller clock cycle - must be symmetrically connected to two DRIVE-CLiQ ports.
25.The fastest sampling time of a drive object in servo control mode is given as:
– Ti = 31.25 µs: Exactly 1 drive object in servo control
– Ti = 62.5 µs: Max. 3 drive objects in servo control
– Ti = 125 µs: Max. 6 drive objects in servo control
26.The fastest sampling time of a drive object in vector control mode is given as:
– Ti = 250 µs: Max. 3 drive objects in vector control
– Ti = 400 µs: Max. 5 drive objects in vector control
– Ti = 500 µs: Max. 6 drive objects in vector control
27.The fastest sampling time of a drive object in vector U/f vector control mode is given as:
– Ti = 500 µs: Max. 12 drive objects in U/f control mode
Commissioning Manual
Commissioning Manual, (IH1), 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AF00-0BP1
23
Preparation for commissioning
1.5 Rules for wiring with DRIVE-CLiQ
28.The maximum number of DRIVE-CLiQ nodes on a DRIVE-CLiQ line of the Control Unit
depends on the basic clock cycle of the DRIVE-CLiQ line:
– For a current controller cycle of 31.25 µs, a maximum of 3 DRIVE-CLiQ nodes are
permissible
– For a current controller cycle of 62.5 µs, a maximum of 5 DRIVE-CLiQ nodes are
permissible
– For a current controller cycle of 125 µs, a maximum of 14 DRIVE-CLiQ nodes are
permissible
– For a current controller cycle of 250 µs, a maximum of 20 DRIVE-CLiQ nodes are
permissible
– For a current controller cycle of 500 µs, a maximum of 30 DRIVE-CLiQ nodes are
permissible
29.Examples for clock cycle level 62.5 µs:
– Topology 1: 1 x ALM (250 µs) + 2 x servo (62.5 µs) + 2 x servo (125 µs) + 3 x TM15 +
TM54F + 4 x dbSI2 with encoder SI Motion monitoring clock cycle (p9500) = 12 ms +
SI Motion actual value sensing clock cycle (p9511) = 4 ms + 4 x dir. measuring
systems
– Topology 2: 1 x ALM (250 µs) + 2 x servo (62.5 µs) + 2 x U/f (500 µs) + 3 x TM15
Base 2 ms +2 x dbSI2 with encoder SI Motion monitoring clock cycle (p9500) = 12 ms
+ SI Motion actual value sensing clock cycle (p9511) = 4 ms + 2 x dbSI2 sensorless +
2 x dir. measuring systems
– Topology 3: 1 x servo (62.5 μs) + 4 x U/f is not possible in connection with Safety
Integrated.
30.Examples for clock cycle level 31.25 µs: 1 x servo (31.25 µs)
31.If the current controller sampling time Ti at one drive object has to be changed in a
sampling time that does not match the other drive objects in the DRIVE-CLiQ line, the
following solutions are available:
– Insert the modified drive object into a separate DRIVE-CLiQ line.
– Modify the current controller sampling times and/or the sampling times of the
inputs/outputs of the other drive objects in the same way, so that they match the
modified sampling time again.
32.Only components that have the same sampling time may be be connected to free DRIVECLiQ connections with a sampling time of Ti = 31.25 μs.
The following components are permissible:
– Sensor Modules
– High-frequency damping modules (HF damping modules)
– Active Line Modules Booksize in the line of the HF filter module.
– Smart Line Modules Booksize in the line of the HF filter module.
– Additional DRIVE-CLiQ lines must be used for further components:
Further Motor Modules in servo control, in vector control, in U/f control or TMs.
Commissioning Manual
24
Commissioning Manual, (IH1), 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AF00-0BP1
Preparation for commissioning
1.5 Rules for wiring with DRIVE-CLiQ
33.Connection of the following components is not permissible for a sampling time of
Ti = 31.25 μs:
– Further Motor Modules in servo control.
– Further Motor Modules in U/f control.
34.Rules for using a TM54F:
– A TM54F must be connected directly to a Control Unit via DRIVE-CLiQ.
– Only one TM54F Terminal Module can be assigned to each Control Unit.
– Additional DRIVE-CLiQ nodes can be operated at the TM54F, such as Sensor
Modules and Terminal Modules (excluding an additional TM54F).
– For a CU310-2, no TM54F may be connected to the same DRIVE-CLiQ line as the
Power Module.
35.A maximum of 4 Motor Modules with Safety Extended Functions may be operated on one
DRIVE-CLiQ line (only for TI = 125 μs). Additional DRIVE-CLiQ components may not be
connected to this DRIVE-CLiQ line.
36.If an axis has only one encoder, and if Safety functions are activated for this axis, then
this encoder may be connected to the Motor Module or to the Hub Module DMC20 only.
37.The following applies to the DRIVE-CLiQ connection of CX/NX components to a Control
Unit:
The connection to the Control Unit is obtained from the PROFIBUS address of the CX/NX
(10 → X100, 11 → X101, 12 → X102, 13 → X103, 14 → X104, 15 → X105).
38.It is not permissible to combine SIMOTION Master Control Units and SINUMERIK Slave
Control Units.
39.It is not permissible to combine SINUMERIK Master Control Units and SIMOTION Slave
Control Units.
Note
To enable the function "Automatic configuration" to assign the encoders to the drives, the
recommended rules below must also be observed.
1.5.2
Recommended DRIVE-CLiQ rules
Recommended DRIVE-CLiQ rules
1. The following applies to all DRIVE-CLiQ components with the exception of the Control
Unit: The DRIVE-CLiQ sockets Xx00 are DRIVE-CliQ inputs, the other DRIVE-CLiQ
sockets are outputs.
Commissioning Manual
Commissioning Manual, (IH1), 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AF00-0BP1
25
Preparation for commissioning
1.5 Rules for wiring with DRIVE-CLiQ
2. A single Line Module should be connected directly to the X100 DRIVE-CLiQ socket of the
Control Unit.
– Several Line Modules should be connected in a line.
– If the X100 DRIVE-CLiQ socket is not available, the next higher DRIVE-CLiQ socket
should be used.
3. For a current controller cycle of 31.25 μs, a filter module should be directly connected to a
DRIVE-CLiQ socket of the Control Unit.
4. For the chassis format, Motor Modules with a current controller cycle of 250 μs should be
connected to DRIVE-CLiQ socket X101 of the Control Unit. If required, they should be
connected in a line.
– If the DRIVE-CLiQ socket X101 is not available, the next higher DRIVE-CLiQ socket
should be used for these Motor Modules.
5. For the chassis format, Motor Modules with a current controller cycle of 400 μs should be
connected to DRIVE-CLiQ socket X102 of the Control Unit. If required, they should be
connected in a line.
– If the DRIVE-CLiQ socket X102 is not available, the next higher DRIVE-CLiQ socket
should be used for these Motor Modules.
6. For the chassis format, the Line Module and the Motor Modules should be connected to
separate DRIVE-CLiQ lines.
7. Peripheral components (e.g. Terminal Module, TM) should be connected to DRIVE-CLiQ
socket X103 of the Control Unit in a line.
– If the DRIVE-CLiQ socket X103 is not available, any free DRIVE-CLiQ socket should
be selected for the peripheral components.
8. For the booksize format, the Motor Modules in servo control mode should be connected
in line to DRIVE-CLiQ socket X100 of the Control Unit.
– If the DRIVE-CLiQ socket X100 is not available, the next higher DRIVE-CLiQ socket
should be used for these Motor Modules.
9. The motor encoders for the first drive of a Double Motor Module should be connected to
the associated DRIVE-CLiQ socket X202.
10.The motor encoders for the second drive of a Double Motor Module should be connected
to the associated DRIVE-CLiQ socket X203.
Commissioning Manual
26
Commissioning Manual, (IH1), 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AF00-0BP1
Preparation for commissioning
1.5 Rules for wiring with DRIVE-CLiQ
11.The motor encoder should be connected to the associated Motor Module:
Connecting the motor encoder via DRIVE-CLiQ:
– Single Motor Module Booksize to terminal X202
– Double Motor Module Booksize motor X1 to terminal X202 and motor X2 to terminal
X203
– Single Motor Module Chassis to terminal X402
– Power Module Blocksize with CUA31: Encoder to terminal X202
– Power Module Blocksize with CUA31: Encoder to terminal X100 or via TM31 to X501
– Power Module Chassis to terminal X402
Note
If an additional encoder is connected to a Motor Module, it is assigned to this drive as
encoder 2 in the automatic configuration.
12.DRIVE-CLiQ sockets should, as far as possible, be symmetrically wired.
Example: Do not connect 8 DRIVE-CLiQ nodes in series at one DRIVE-CLiQ socket of
the CU - but instead, connect 2 nodes at each of the 4 DRIVE-CLiQ sockets.
13.The DRIVE-CLiQ cable from the Control Unit should be connected to DRIVE-CLiQ socket
X200 on the first booksize power unit or X400 on the first chassis power unit.
14.The DRIVE-CLiQ connections between the power units should each be connected from
the DRIVE-CLiQ sockets X201 to X200 and/or X401 to X400 on the follow-on component.
15.A Power Module with the CUA31 should be connected to the end of the DRIVE-CLiQ line.
&RQWURO
8QLW
6LQJOH
0RWRU
0RGXOH
'RXEOH
0RWRU
0RGXOH
6LQJOH
0RWRU
0RGXOH
;;
;
;;
;
;;
;
;;
;
;;
;
;;
3RZHU0RGXOH
%ORFNVL]H
;
;
;
Figure 1-3
&8$
;
;
;
Example: DRIVE-CLiQ line
16.Only one final node should be connected to free DRIVE-CLiQ sockets of components
within a DRIVE-CLiQ line (e.g. Motor Modules wired in series), for example, one Sensor
Module or one Terminal Module, without routing to additional components.
17.If possible, Terminal Modules and Sensor Modules of direct measuring systems should
not be connected to the DRIVE-CLiQ line of Motor Modules, but rather, to free DRIVECLiQ sockets of the Control Unit.
Note: This restriction does not apply to star-type connections.
18.The TM54F should not be operated on the same DRIVE-CLiQ line as Motor Modules.
Commissioning Manual
Commissioning Manual, (IH1), 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AF00-0BP1
27
Preparation for commissioning
1.5 Rules for wiring with DRIVE-CLiQ
19.The Terminal Modules TM15, TM17 and TM41 have faster sample cycles than the TM31
and TM54F. For this reason, the two Terminal Module groups should be connected to
separate DRIVE-CLiQ lines.
20.For mixed operation of the servo control and vector U/f control operating modes, separate
DRIVE-CLiQ lines should be used for the Motor Modules.
– Mixed operation of operating modes is not possible on a Double Motor Module.
21.The Voltage Sensing Module (VSM) should be connected to the DRIVE-CLiQ socket
X202 (Booksize format) or X402 (Chassis format) of the Line Module.
– If the X202/X402 DRIVE-CLiQ sockets are not available, a free DRIVE-CLiQ socket of
the Line Module should be used.
&RQWURO
8QLW
$FWLYH
/LQH
0RGXOH
6LQJOH
0RWRU
0RGXOH
;
;
;;
;
;;
;
;;
;
;;
;;
960
;;
Figure 1-4
Example of a topology with VSM for booksize and chassis components
Table 1- 5
VSM connection
Component
VSM connection
Active Line Module booksize
X202
Active Line Module chassis
X402
Power Module chassis
X402
Motor Module Chassis
X402 (active with PEM encoderless and "Flying restart"
function)
Commissioning Manual
28
Commissioning Manual, (IH1), 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AF00-0BP1
Preparation for commissioning
1.5 Rules for wiring with DRIVE-CLiQ
1.5.3
Wiring example for drives in vector control mode
Example 1
A drive line-up with three Motor Modules in chassis format with identical pulse frequencies or
three Motor Modules in booksize format in vector control mode:
The Motor Modules Chassis with identical pulse frequencies or the Motor Modules Booksize
in vector control mode can be connected to one DRIVE-CLiQ interface on the Control Unit.
In the following diagram, three Motor Modules are connected to the DRIVE-CLiQ socket
X101.
Note
This topology does not match the topology created offline by STARTER and must be
changed manually.
,QIHHG
'ULYH
'ULYH
'ULYH
$FWLYH
/LQH
0RGXOH
6LQJOH
0RWRU
0RGXOH
6LQJOH
0RWRU
0RGXOH
6LQJOH
0RWRU
0RGXOH
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
&RQWURO
8QLW
;
$FWLYH
,QWHUIDFH
0RGXOH
;
;
;
;
60&
60&
60&
0
0
0
960
Figure 1-5
'5,9(&/L4
(QFRGHU
3RZHU
Drive line-up (chassis) with identical pulse frequencies
Commissioning Manual
Commissioning Manual, (IH1), 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AF00-0BP1
29
Preparation for commissioning
1.5 Rules for wiring with DRIVE-CLiQ
Drive line-up comprising four Motor Modules in chassis format with different pulse frequencies
Motor Modules with different pulse frequencies must be connected to different DRIVE-CLiQ
sockets on the Control Unit.
In the following diagram, two Motor Modules (400 V, output ≤ 250 kW, pulse frequency
2 kHz) are connected to interface X101 and two Motor Modules (400 V, output > 250 kW,
pulse frequency 1.25 kHz) are connected to interface X102.
Note
This topology does not match the topology created offline by STARTER and must be
changed manually.
,QIHHG
'ULYH
'ULYH
'ULYH
'ULYH
$FWLYH
/LQH
0RGXOH
6LQJOH
0RWRU
0RGXOH
6LQJOH
0RWRU
0RGXOH
6LQJOH
0RWRU
0RGXOH
6LQJOH
0RWRU
0RGXOH
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
60&
60&
60&
60&
0
0
0
0
&RQWURO
8QLW
;
$FWLYH
,QWHUIDFH
0RGXOH
;
960
Figure 1-6
'5,9(&/L4
(QFRGHU
3RZHU
Drive line-up in chassis format with different pulse frequencies
Commissioning Manual
30
Commissioning Manual, (IH1), 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AF00-0BP1
Preparation for commissioning
1.5 Rules for wiring with DRIVE-CLiQ
1.5.4
Wiring example for parallel connection of Motor Modules in vector control mode
Drive line-up with two parallel-connected Line Modules and Motor Modules in chassis format of the
same type
Parallel-connected Line Modules in chassis format and Motor Modules in chassis format of
the same type can be connected to a DRIVE-CLiQ socket of the Control Unit.
In the following diagram, two Active Line Modules and two Motor Modules are connected to
the X100 or X101 socket.
For further information on parallel connection, see the chapter "Parallel connection of power
units" in the SINAMICS S120 Function Manual.
Note
This topology does not match the topology created offline by STARTER and must be
changed manually.
,QIHHG
'ULYH
$FWLYH
/LQH
0RGXOH
$FWLYH
/LQH
0RGXOH
6LQJOH
0RWRU
0RGXOH
6LQJOH
0RWRU
0RGXOH
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
$FWLYH
,QWHUIDFH
0RGXOH
$FWLYH
,QWHUIDFH
0RGXOH
;
;
;
60&
960
960
&RQWURO
8QLW
;
;
0
'5,9(&/L4
(QFRGHU
3RZHU
Figure 1-7
Drive line-up with parallel-connected power units in chassis format
Commissioning Manual
Commissioning Manual, (IH1), 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AF00-0BP1
31
Preparation for commissioning
1.5 Rules for wiring with DRIVE-CLiQ
1.5.5
Sample wiring: Power Modules
Blocksize
'5,9(&/L4
'5,9(&/L4
;
;
&RQWURO
8QLW
;
'5,9(&/L4
&RQWURO
8QLW
$GDSWHU
;
60&
;
;
70
;
60&
;
;
3RZHU0RGXOH
%ORFNVL]H
3RZHU0RGXOH
%ORFNVL]H
(QFRGHU
FDEOH
0RWRUFDEOH
Figure 1-8
0RWRUFDEOH
(QFRGHUFDEOH
Wiring example for Power Modules Blocksize
Commissioning Manual
32
Commissioning Manual, (IH1), 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AF00-0BP1
Preparation for commissioning
1.5 Rules for wiring with DRIVE-CLiQ
Chassis
'5,9(&/L4
;
&RQWURO
8QLW
3RZHU0RGXOH&KDVVLV
;
;
60&
;
70
;
0RWRUFDEOH
(QFRGHUFDEOH
Figure 1-9
Wiring example for Power Modules Chassis
Commissioning Manual
Commissioning Manual, (IH1), 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AF00-0BP1
33
Preparation for commissioning
1.5 Rules for wiring with DRIVE-CLiQ
1.5.6
Changing the offline topology in STARTER
The device topology can be changed in STARTER by moving the components in the
topology tree.
Table 1- 6
Example: changing the DRIVE-CLiQ topology
Topology tree view
Remark
Select the DRIVE-CLiQ component.
Keeping the mouse button depressed,
drag the component to the required
DRIVE-CLiQ interface and release the
mouse button.
You have changed the topology in
STARTER.
Commissioning Manual
34
Commissioning Manual, (IH1), 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AF00-0BP1
Preparation for commissioning
1.5 Rules for wiring with DRIVE-CLiQ
1.5.7
Offline correction of the reference topology
Description
The topology is based on a modular machine concept. The machine concept is created
"Offline" in STARTER in the maximum version as reference topology.
The maximum version is the maximum expansion of a particular machine type. In the
maximum version, all the machine components that can be used are pre-configured in the
reference topology.
Deactivate components and does not exist
In a lower expansion stage of the machine, in the reference topology, you must select the
drive objects and encoder not used in the actual topology. To do this, for the corresponding
drive objects and encoder, set parameter p0105 or p0145 = 2 (deactivate component and
does not exist). Components set to the value "2" in a project generated offline must never be
inserted in the actual topology at all.
If a component fails, the sub-topology can also be used to allow a machine to continue to
operate until the spare part is available. In this case, however, no BICO source must be
interconnected from this drive object to other drive objects.
Example of a sub-topology
The starting point is a machine created "offline" in STARTER. "Drive 1" was not implemented
for this machine.
● You can remove drive object "Drive 1" "offline" from the reference topology using p0105 =
2.
● Change over the DRIVE-CLiQ cable from the Control Unit directly to "Drive 2".
Commissioning Manual
Commissioning Manual, (IH1), 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AF00-0BP1
35
Preparation for commissioning
1.5 Rules for wiring with DRIVE-CLiQ
● Transfer the project with "Download to drive unit".
● Then execute a "Copy RAM to ROM".
,QIHHG
'ULYH
'ULYH
$FWLYH
/LQH
0RGXOH
6LQJOH
0RWRU
0RGXOH
6LQJOH
0RWRU
0RGXOH
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
$FWLYH
,QWHUIDFH
0RGXOH
;
;
;
60&
;
60&
0
0
&8
;
6HWSRLQW
WRSRORJ\
;
960
&8
,QIHHG
'ULYH
$FWLYH
/LQH
0RGXOH
6LQJOH
0RWRU
0RGXOH
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
$FWLYH
,QWHUIDFH
0RGXOH
;
;
UHFRQQHFWHG
;
3DUWLDO
WRSRORJ\
;
;
60&
960
0
'5,9(&/L4
(QFRGHU
3RZHU
Figure 1-10
Example of a sub-topology
CAUTION
Commissioning Manual
36
Commissioning Manual, (IH1), 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AF00-0BP1
Preparation for commissioning
1.5 Rules for wiring with DRIVE-CLiQ
If a drive in a Safety Integrated drive line-up is deactivated using p0105, then r9774 is
not correctly output because the signals of the deactivated drive are no longer updated.
Remedy: Before deactivating, take this drive out of the group. See also: SINAMICS
S120 Safety Integrated Function Manual
Activating/deactivating components
Drive objects can be activated/deactivated using parameter p0105 and encoders with
p0145[0...n] in the Expert list in the same way. If a component is not required at certain
times, then change the component parameters p0105 or p0145 from "1" to "0". The
deactivated components remain inserted, however, they are deactivated. Errors are not
displayed from deactivated components.
Overview of important parameters (see SINAMICS S120/S150 List Manual)
● p0105 Activate/deactivate drive object
● r0106 Drive object active/inactive
● p0125 Activate/deactivate power unit component
● r0126 Power unit component active/inactive
● p0145[0...n] activate/deactivate encoder interface
● r0146 Encoder interface active/inactive
● p9495 BICO response to deactivated drive objects
● p9496 Re-establish BICO to the now activated drive objects
● r9498[0...29] BICO BI/CI parameter for deactivated drive objects
● r9499[0...29] BICO BO/CO parameter for deactivated drive objects
● r9774.0...31 CO/BO: SI Status (group STO)
Commissioning Manual
Commissioning Manual, (IH1), 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AF00-0BP1
37
Preparation for commissioning
1.5 Rules for wiring with DRIVE-CLiQ
1.5.8
Sample wiring for servo drives
The following diagram shows the maximum number of controllable servo drives and extra
components. The sampling times of individual system components are:
● Active Line Module: p0115[0] = 250 µs
● Motor Modules: p0115[0] = 125 µs
● Terminal Module/Terminal Board p4099 = 1 ms
60\
60[
60[
60[
60[
60[
60[
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
600
600
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
70[
&RQWURO
8QLW
'00
600
600
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
60\
;
;
;
;
60\
$/0
;
;
;
;
Figure 1-11
Sample servo topology
Legend for topology example:
ALM = Active Line Module
SMM = Single Motor Module
DMM = Double Motor Module
SMx = Motor encoder
SMy = Direct measuring system
TMx = TM31, TM15DI/DO, TB30
Commissioning Manual
38
Commissioning Manual, (IH1), 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AF00-0BP1
Preparation for commissioning
1.5 Rules for wiring with DRIVE-CLiQ
1.5.9
Sample wiring for vector V/f drives
The following diagram shows the maximum number of controllable vector V/f drives with
additional components. The sampling times of individual system components are:
● Active Line Module: p0115[0] = 250 µs
● Motor Modules: p0115[0] = 125 µs
● Terminal Module/Terminal Board p4099 = 1 ms
● Max. 12 axes can be controlled in V/f mode
;
;
70[
600
600
600
600
&8
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
$/0
600
600
600
600
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
Figure 1-12
1.5.10
$/0 $FWLYH/LQH0RGXOH
600 6LQJOH0RWRU0RGXOH
70[ 7070','2
Sample topology for vector V/f control
Notes on the number of controllable drives
The number and type of controlled axes and the extra activated functions of the project can
be scaled by configuring the firmware. Especially for demanding configurations, drives with
high dynamics or a large number of axes with additional utilization of special functions for
example, a check using the SIZER configuration tool is recommended. The SIZER
calculates the feasibility of the project.
The maximum possible functionality depends on the performance of the Control Unit used
and the components configured.
Commissioning Manual
Commissioning Manual, (IH1), 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AF00-0BP1
39
Preparation for commissioning
1.5 Rules for wiring with DRIVE-CLiQ
1.5.10.1
System sampling times and number of controllable drives
This chapter contains a list of the axes that can be operated with SINAMICS S120
depending on the cycle times in the various control modes. The other available remaining
computation times are available for options (e.g. DCC).
Cycle times for the "servo" control mode
The following table shows the number of axes that can be operated depending on the
selected cycle times in the "servo" control mode:
Table 1- 7
Sampling time setting for servo
Cycle times [µs]
Current
controller
Motor / dir.
measuring
systems
Number
Speed controller
Axes
Infeed
TM1) / TB
125
125
6
1 [250 μs]
6/6
3 [2000 μs]
62.5
62.5
3
1 [250 μs]
3/3
3 [2000 μs]
31.252)
31.252)
1
1 [250 μs]
1/1
3 [2000 μs]
1) Valid for TM31 or TM15IO; for TM54F, TM41, TM15, TM17, TM120 - restrictions are possible dependent on the set
sampling time.
2) In the clock cycle level 31.25 µs you can additionally set-up the following objects:
- 1 servo axis with a sampling time of 125 µs
- 2 U/f axes with a sampling time of 500 µs
The following combinations are permissible for current controller cycle mixed operation:
● Servo with 125 µs and servo with 250 µs (only 2 clock cycle levels may be mixed)
● Servo with 62.5 µs and servo with 125 µs (only 2 clock cycle levels may be mixed)
Note the following: 1 axis with 31.25 µs corresponds to
● 2 servo axes with 62.5 µs
● 4 servo axes with 125 µs
● 8 U/f axes with 500 µs
Commissioning Manual
40
Commissioning Manual, (IH1), 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AF00-0BP1
Preparation for commissioning
1.5 Rules for wiring with DRIVE-CLiQ
Cycle times in the "vector" control mode
The following table shows the number of axes that can be operated depending on the
selected cycle times in the "vector" control mode:
Table 1- 8
Sampling time setting for vector
Cycle times [µs]
Current
controller
Number
Speed controller
Axes
Infeed2)
Motor / dir.
measuring
systems
TM1) / TB
500
2000
6
1 [250 μs]
6/6
3 [2000 μs]
4003)
1600
5
1 [250 μs]
5/5
3 [2000 μs]
250
1000
3
1 [250 μs]
3/3
3 [2000 μs]
1) Valid for TM31 or TM15IO; for TM54F, TM41, TM15, TM17, TM120 - restrictions are possible dependent on the set
sampling time.
2) For power units in chassis format, the infeed cycle depends on the power rating of the module and can assume values
of 400 μs, 375 μs or 250 μs.
3) This setting results in lower remaining computation times.
The following combination is permissible in current controller cycle mixed operation:
● Vector with 250 µs and vector with 500 µs
NOTICE
Restriction for chassis format in the case of special functions
If edge modulation and wobbling are activated simultaneously with p1802 ≥ 7 and
p1810.2 = 1 respectively, the quantity structure for vector control is halved. Then, for
example, a maximum of 3 axes at a current control cycle of 500 µs, 2 axes at 400 µs or
1 axis at 250 µs are possible.
Commissioning Manual
Commissioning Manual, (IH1), 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AF00-0BP1
41
Preparation for commissioning
1.5 Rules for wiring with DRIVE-CLiQ
Cycle times in the "Vector U/f" control mode
The following table shows the number of axes that can be operated depending on the
selected cycle times in the "Vector U/f" control mode:
Table 1- 9
Sampling time setting for vector U/f
Cycle times [µs]
Current
controller
500
Number
Speed controller
2000
Drives /
Infeed
12
TM/TB
Motor / dir.
measuring
systems
1 [250 μs]
-/-
3 [2000 μs]
Mixed operation of the "Servo" and "Vector U/f" control modes
In mixed "Servo" with "Vector U/f control" operation, one axis with servo control is considered
to be two axes in U/f control mode.
Table 1- 10
Number of axes for mixed operation of servo controller and U/f control
Number of axes in servo control
6
125 µs
5
125 µs
4
125 µs
3
125 µs
2
125 µs
1
125 µs
0
3
2
1
Number of axes in U/f control
62.5 µs
0
62.5 µs
62.5 µs
0
2
500 µs
4
500 µs
6
500 µs
8
500 µs
10
500 µs
12
500 µs
Mixed operation of the "Vector" and "Vector U/f" operating modes
In mixed "Vector" with "Vector U/f control" operation, one axis in vector control is considered
to be two axes in U/f control mode. A maximum of 6 axes are permitted in conjunction with
vector control.
Table 1- 11
Number of axes for mixed operation of vector controller and U/f control
Number of axes in vector control
Number of axes in U/f control
6
250 µs
0
5
250 µs
1
500 µs
4
250 µs
2
500 µs
3
250 µs
3
500 µs
2
250 µs
4
500 µs
1
250 µs
5
500 µs
12
500 µs
0
Commissioning Manual
42
Commissioning Manual, (IH1), 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AF00-0BP1
Preparation for commissioning
1.5 Rules for wiring with DRIVE-CLiQ
Using DCC
The available remaining computation time can be used for DCC. In this case, the following
supplementary conditions apply:
● For a 2 ms time slice, a max. of 75 DCC blocks can be configured for each servo axis
with 125 μs that can be omitted/eliminated (≙ 2 U/f axes with 500 μs).
● 75 DCC blocks for 2 ms time slice correspond to 2 U/f axes with 500 μs.
● 50 DCC blocks for 2 ms time slice correspond to 1.5 U/f axes with 500 μs.
Using EPOS
The following table shows the number of axes that can be operated depending on the
selected cycle times
Table 1- 12
Sampling times when using EPOS
Cycle times [µs]
Number
Current controller
Speed controller
Axes
Infeed
250
250
6
1 [250 μs]
250
250
5
1 [250 μs]
125
125
4
1 [250 μs]
The use of an EPOS function module (with 1 ms position controller/4 ms positioner)
corresponds to 0.5 U/f axes with 500 μs.
Using CUA31/CUA32
Information on using the Control Unit Adapter CUA31 or CUA32:
● CUA31/32 is the first component in the CUA31/32 topology: 5 axes
● CUA31/32 is not the first component in the CUA31/32 topology: 6 axes
● For a current controller cycle of 62.5 µs, only 1 axis is possible with one CUA31/32.
Commissioning Manual
Commissioning Manual, (IH1), 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AF00-0BP1
43
Preparation for commissioning
1.5 Rules for wiring with DRIVE-CLiQ
1.5.10.2
Optimizing DRIVE-CLiQ
Symmetrical distribution for the controller clock cycles 62.5 µs and 31.25 µs
For faster computation times of the master Control Unit, the axes must be distributed across
the DRIVE-CLiQ connections as follows:
● DRIVE-CLiQ socket X100: Infeed, axes 2, 4, 6, ...
● DRIVE-CLiQ socket X101: Axes 1, 3, 5, ...
Axes 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, ... this should indicate the sequence of the drive controllers.
The advantage of this arrangement is that the Control Unit always receives 2 measured
values simultaneously.
Commissioning Manual
44
Commissioning Manual, (IH1), 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AF00-0BP1
Preparation for commissioning
1.5 Rules for wiring with DRIVE-CLiQ
1.5.10.3
Default settings for the sampling times
When commissioning for the first time, the current controller sampling times (p0115[0]) are
automatically pre-set with factory setting values:
Table 1- 13
Factory settings
Construction type
Number
p0112
p0115[0]
p1800
Active Infeed and Smart Infeed
Booksize
1
2 (Low)
250 µs
-
Chassis
400 V / ≤ 300 kW
690 V / ≤ 330 kW
1
2 (Low)
250 µs
-
Chassis
400 V / > 300 kW
690 V / > 330 kW
1
0 (Expert)
1 (xLow)
375 µs (p0092 = 1)
400 µs (p0092 = 0)
-
Booksize
1
4 (High)
250 µs
-
Chassis
1
3 (Standard)
2000 µs
-
1 to 6
3 (Standard)
125 µs
4 kHz
Basic Infeed
Servo
Booksize
Chassis
1 to 6
1 (xLow)
250 µs
2 kHz
Blocksize
1 to 5
3 (Standard)
125 µs
4 kHz
1 to 3 only n_ctrl
1 to 6 only U/f
3 (Standard)
250 µs
4 kHz
4 to 6 only n_ctrl
7 to 12 only U/f
0 (Expert)
Chassis
> 250 kW
690 V
1 to 4 only n_ctrl
1 to 5 only U/f
1 to 6 only n_ctrl
0 (Expert)
1 (xLow)
0 (Expert)
375 µs (p0092 = 1)
400 µs (p0092 = 0)
500 µs (p0092 = 1)
Booksize
> 6 only U/f
0 (Expert)
500 µs
Vector
Booksize
Chassis
400 V / ≤ 250 kW
Booksize
Chassis
400 V / ≤ 250 kW
2 kHz
500 µs
2 kHz
Chassis
Blocksize
4 kHz
1.333 kHz
1.25 kHz
2 kHz
4 kHz
2 kHz
1 to 3 only n_ctrl
1 to 6 only U/f
3 (Standard)
250 µs
4 kHz
> 3 n_ctrl (min. 1)
> 6 only U/f
0 (Expert)
500 µs
4 kHz
Caution
If a Power Module in blocksize format is connected to a Control Unit, the sampling times of all vector drives are set
according to the rules for Power Modules in blocksize format (only 250 µs or 500 µs possible).
Commissioning Manual
Commissioning Manual, (IH1), 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AF00-0BP1
45
Preparation for commissioning
1.6 Powering-up/powering-down the drive system
1.6
Powering-up/powering-down the drive system
Powering up the infeed
32:(521
6&ORVLQJORFNRXW
6
[
!=6:$ =6:$ !
2SHQ
OLQHFRQWDFWRU
&RPPLVVLRQLQJUHDG\
S DQGS 2))67:$(
2))67:$(
9DW(3WHUPLQDOV
!
0RWRU0RGXOH!
65HDG\WRVWDUW
6
=6:$ !
=6:$ 0DLQFRQWDFWRURSHQ
:DLWIRUVZLWFKRQ
$86
S
2SHQ
OLQHFRQWDFWRU
7
!
65HDG\
=6:$ =6:$ !
2))
/LQHFRQWDFWRULV&/26('
:DLWIRUSUHFKDUJLQJ
!
(QDEOHRSHUDWLRQ67:$
S
7
! $86
6RSHUDWLRQ
=6:$( =6:$( 3XOVHVHQDEOHG
&RQWUROOHUHQDEOHG
!
!67:$[[ FRQWUROZRUGVHTXHQFHFRQWUROELW[[U
=6:$[[ VWDWXVZRUGVHTXHQFHFRQWUROELW[[U
!U RSHUDWLQJGLVSOD\
!RQO\UHTXLUHGLI6DIH7RUTXH2II672VDIHW\IXQFWLRQLVDFWLYDWHG
Figure 1-13
Powering up the infeed
Commissioning Manual
46
Commissioning Manual, (IH1), 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AF00-0BP1
Preparation for commissioning
1.6 Powering-up/powering-down the drive system
Powering up the drive
32:(521
6&ORVLQJORFNRXW
'ULYHDWVWDQGVWLOO
[
!=6:$ =6:$ !
3XOVHHQDEOH+:
>)3@>)3@
&RPPLVVLRQLQJUHDG\
S DQGS 2))67:$
2))67:$
!
6E4XLFNVWRS
2))67:$
=6:$ =6:$ =6:$ 9DW(3WHUPLQDOV
'ULYHYLDIDVWVWRSUDPS
RUWRUTXHOLPLWWRQ !
0RWRU0RGXOH!
65HDG\WRVWDUW
WUDYHOWKHQGLVDEOHSXOVHV
=6:$ !
=6:$ /LQHFRQWDFWRULV23(1
:DLWIRUVZLWFKRQ
,QIHHGUHDG\
S
$86
!
IURP/LQH0RGXOHRU,1)(('
U
3XOVHHQDEOH+:
>)3@
65HDG\
=6:$ =6:$ !
/LQHFRQWDFWRULV&/26('
:DLWIRUSUHFKDUJLQJ
6D5DPSVWRS
=6:$ =6:$ =6:$ (QDEOHRSHUDWLRQ67:$
5HDG\IURP0RWRU0RGXOHU
'HPDJQHWL]DWLRQFRPSOHWHG
U $86
!
6RSHUDWLRQ
=6:$ =6:$ =6:$ !
3XOVHVHQDEOHG
&RQWUROOHUHQDEOHG
!67:$[[ FRQWUROZRUGVHTXHQFHFRQWUROELW[[U
=6:$[[ VWDWXVZRUGVHTXHQFHFRQWUROELW[[U
!U RSHUDWLQJGLVSOD\
!RQO\UHTXLUHGLI6DIH7RUTXH2II672VDIHW\IXQFWLRQLVDFWLYDWHG
Figure 1-14
Powering up the drive
Commissioning Manual
Commissioning Manual, (IH1), 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AF00-0BP1
47
Preparation for commissioning
1.6 Powering-up/powering-down the drive system
Off responses
● OFF1
– n_set = 0 is input immediately to brake the drive along the deceleration ramp (p1121).
– When zero speed is detected, the motor holding brake (if parameterized) is closed
(p1215). The pulses are suppressed when the brake application time (p1217) expires.
Zero speed is detected if the actual speed drops below the threshold (p1226) or if the
monitoring time (p1227) started when the speed setpoint ≤ speed threshold (p1226)
has expired.
● OFF2
– Instantaneous pulse suppression, the drive "coasts" to a standstill.
– The motor holding brake (if parameterized) is closed immediately.
– Switching on inhibited is activated.
● OFF3
– n_set=0 is input immediately to brake the drive along the OFF3 deceleration ramp
(p1135).
– When zero speed is detected, the motor holding brake (if parameterized) is closed.
The pulses are suppressed when the brake application time (p1217) expires. Zero
speed is detected if the actual speed drops below the threshold (p1226) or if the
monitoring time (p1227) started when the speed setpoint ≤ speed threshold (p1226)
has expired.
– Switching on inhibited is activated.
Commissioning Manual
48
Commissioning Manual, (IH1), 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AF00-0BP1
Preparation for commissioning
1.6 Powering-up/powering-down the drive system
Control and status messages
Table 1- 14
Power-on/power-off control
Signal name
Internal control word
Binector input
PROFdrive/Siemens
telegram 1 ... 352
0 = OFF1
STWA.00
STWAE.00
p0840 ON/OFF1
STW1.0
0 = OFF2
STWA.01
STWAE.01
p0844 1. OFF2
p0845 2. OFF2
STW1.1
0 = OFF3
STWA.02
p0848 1. OFF3
p0849 2. OFF3
STW1.2
Enable operation
STWA.03
STWAE.03
p0852 Enable operation
STW1.3
Table 1- 15
Switch-in/switch-out status signal
Signal name
Internal status word
Parameter
PROFdrive/Siemens
telegram 1 ... 352
Ready for switching on
ZSWA.00
ZSWAE.00
r0899.0
ZSW1.0
Ready for operation
ZSWA.01
ZSWAE.01
r0899.1
ZSW1.1
Operation enabled
ZSWA.02
ZSWAE.02
r0899.2
ZSW1.2
Pulse inhibit
ZSWA.06
ZSWAE.06
r0899.6
ZSW1.6
Pulses enabled
ZSWA.11
r0899.11
ZSW2.10 1)
1)
only available in Interface Mode p2038 = 0
Function diagrams (see SINAMICS S120/S150 List Manual)
● 2610 Sequence control - sequencer
● 2634 Missing enable signals, line contactor control
● 8732 Basic Infeed - sequencer
● 8832 Smart Infeed - sequencer
● 8932 Active Infeed - sequencer
Commissioning Manual
Commissioning Manual, (IH1), 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AF00-0BP1
49
Preparation for commissioning
1.6 Powering-up/powering-down the drive system
Commissioning Manual
50
Commissioning Manual, (IH1), 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AF00-0BP1
2
Commissioning
2.1
Procedure when commissioning
Once the basic requirements have been met, commissioning can proceed in the following
steps:
Table 2- 1
Commissioning
Step
Activity
1
Create project with STARTER.
2
Configure the drive unit in STARTER.
3
Save the project in STARTER.
4
Go online with the target device in STARTER.
5
Load the project to the target device.
6
The motor starts to run.
Note
If motors with a DRIVE-CLiQ interface are used, when the Sensor Module is replaced at the
motor, all motor and encoder data should be saved in a non-volatile manner by setting
parameter p4692 = 1.
Commissioning Manual
Commissioning Manual, (IH1), 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AF00-0BP1
51
Commissioning
2.1 Procedure when commissioning
2.1.1
Safety guidelines
DANGER
A hazardous voltage will be present in all components for a further five minutes after the
system has been shutdown.
Note the information on the component!
CAUTION
A project with Safety Integrated can be generated offline; an acceptance test must be
carried out when commissioning, which is only possible online.
Note
The design guidelines and safety information in the Equipment Manuals must be carefully
observed (refer to the documentation SINAMICS S120, Equipment Manual GH1).
CAUTION
In STARTER, after the changeover of the axis type via p9302/p9502 and subsequent
POWER ON, the units that depend on the axis type are only updated after a project upload.
Commissioning Manual
52
Commissioning Manual, (IH1), 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AF00-0BP1
Commissioning
2.2 STARTER commissioning tool
2.2
STARTER commissioning tool
Short description
The STARTER commissioning tool is used to commission drive units from the SINAMICS
product family.
STARTER can be used for the following:
● Commissioning
● Testing (via the control panel)
● Drive optimization
● Diagnostics
System prerequisites
You can find the system requirements for STARTER in the "readme" file in the STARTER
installation directory.
2.2.1
Important STARTER functions
Description
STARTER provides, among others, the following tools for handling projects:
● Restoring the factory settings
● Commissioning Wizard
● Configuring and parameterizing a drive
● Creating and copying data sets
● Loading the project from the PG/PC into the target device
● Copy RAM to ROM
● Loading the project from the target device into the PG/PC
Restoring the factory settings
You can use this function to set all the parameters in the working memory of the Control Unit
to the factory settings. To ensure that the data on the memory card is also reset to the
factory settings, choose the "Copy from RAM to ROM" function.
This function can be activated as follows:
● Right-click Drive unit -> Target system -> Restore factory settings
● Drive unit grayed out -> "Restore factory settings" button
For more information about STARTER, see Getting Started for SINAMICS S120.
Commissioning Manual
Commissioning Manual, (IH1), 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AF00-0BP1
53
Commissioning
2.2 STARTER commissioning tool
Creating and copying data sets (offline)
Drive and command data sets (DDS and CDS) can be added in the drive's configuration
screen. For this, the appropriate buttons must be pressed. Before data sets are copied, all
the wiring needed for both data sets should be completed.
For more information about data sets, refer to the Basics chapter in the SINAMICS S120
Function Manual Drive Functions.
Download to target device
You can use this function to load the current STARTER project to the Control Unit. A
consistency check is first made for the project; if inconsistencies are detected, then the
associated messages are output. You must resolve these inconsistencies before loading. If
no inconsistencies are detected, then the data is loaded into the work memory of the Control
Unit and then a reset is initiated.
This function can be activated as follows:
● Right-click Drive unit -> Target system -> Load to target system
● Drive unit grayed out -> "Load to target system" button
● Online/offline comparison screen form -> "Load project to target device" button
● Project to all drive units simultaneously:
"Load project to target system" button or menu Project -> Load to target system
Copy RAM to ROM
You can use this function to save volatile Control Unit data to the non-volatile memory
(memory card). This ensures that the data is still available after the 24 V Control Unit supply
has been switched off.
This function can be activated as follows:
● Extras -> Setting -> Download -> Activate "Copy from RAM to ROM"
This means that every time data is loaded to the target system by choosing "Load project
to target system", the data is stored in the non-volatile memory.
● Right-click Drive unit -> Target system -> Copy from RAM to ROM
● Drive unit grayed out -> "Copy from RAM to ROM" button
Load to PG/PC
You can use this function to load the current Control Unit project to STARTER.
This function can be activated as follows:
● Right-click Drive unit -> Target system -> Load to PG/PC
● Drive unit grayed out -> "Load to PG" button
● "ONLINE/OFFLINE comparison" screen -> "Load to PG" button
Commissioning Manual
54
Commissioning Manual, (IH1), 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AF00-0BP1
Commissioning
2.2 STARTER commissioning tool
2.2.2
Activating online operation: STARTER via PROFIBUS
Description
The following options are available for online operation via PROFIBUS:
● Online operation via PROFIBUS adapter
STARTER via PROFIBUS (example with 2 CU320-2 DP)
3*3&
67$57(5
352),%86
DGDSWHU
352),%86
352),%86LQWHUIDFH
'3DGGUHVV
+
$GGUHVV
$GGUHVV
/
Figure 2-1
Connecting the programming device to the target device via PROFIBUS
Commissioning Manual
Commissioning Manual, (IH1), 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AF00-0BP1
55
Commissioning
2.2 STARTER commissioning tool
Settings in STARTER for direct online connection via PROFIBUS
The following settings are required in STARTER for communication via PROFIBUS:
● Tools -> Set PG/PC Interface...
Add/remove interfaces
● Extras -> Set PG/PC interface... -> Properties
Activate/deactivate "PG/PC is the only master on the bus".
Note
 Baud rate
– Connecting STARTER to an operational PROFIBUS:
STARTER automatically detects the baud rate used by SINAMICS for PROFIBUS.
– Connecting STARTER for commissioning:
The Control Unit automatically detects the baud rate set in STARTER.
 PROFIBUS addresses
The PROFIBUS addresses for the individual drive units must be specified in the
project and must match the address settings on the devices.
2.2.3
Activating online operation: STARTER via Ethernet
Description
The Control Unit can be commissioned using a programming device (PG/PC) via the
integrated Ethernet Interface. This interface is provided for commissioning purposes only
and cannot be used to control the drive in operation. Routing in conjunction with a CBE20
expansion card is not possible.
Preconditions
● STARTER from version 4.1.5 or higher
STARTER via Ethernet (example)
(WKHUQHW
LQWHUIDFH
67$57(5
3*3&
(WKHUQHW
DGDSWHU
Figure 2-2
(WKHUQHW
&RQWURO
8QLW
'HYLFH
,3
Connecting the programming device to the target device via Ethernet (example)
Commissioning Manual
56
Commissioning Manual, (IH1), 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AF00-0BP1
Commissioning
2.2 STARTER commissioning tool
Procedure for establishing online operation via Ethernet
1. Installing the Ethernet interface in the PG/PC according to the manufacturer's
specifications
2. Setting the IP address in Windows XP.
The PG/PC is assigned a free IP address here (e.g. 169.254.11.1). The factory setting of
the internal Ethernet interface X127 of the Control Unit is 169.254.11.22.
3. Setting the online interface in STARTER.
4. Assigning the IP address and the name via the STARTER tool.
Setting the IP address in Windows XP
On your desktop, right-click "Network environment" -> Properties -> double-click on the
network card and choose -> Properties -> Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) -> Properties -> Enter
the IP addresses and the subnet mask.
Figure 2-3
Setting the IP address from the PG/PC
Commissioning Manual
Commissioning Manual, (IH1), 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AF00-0BP1
57
Commissioning
2.2 STARTER commissioning tool
Settings in STARTER
In STARTER, communication via Ethernet should be set as follows (the Ethernet interface
that we use in this example has the designation Realtek RTL8139):
Tools -> Set PG/PC Interface...
Figure 2-4
Selecting the Ethernet interface at the programming device
Right-click on the the drive unit -> Target device -> Online access -> Module address
Commissioning Manual
58
Commissioning Manual, (IH1), 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AF00-0BP1
Commissioning
2.2 STARTER commissioning tool
Figure 2-5
Setting online access
Assigning the IP address and the name
Note
ST (Structured Text) conventions must be satisfied for the name assignment of IO devices in
Ethernet (SINAMICS components). The names must be unique within Ethernet.
The characters "-" and "." are not permitted in the name of an IO device.
Note
The IP address and device name for the Control Unit are stored on the memory card (nonvolatile).
Assignment with STARTER, "Accessible nodes" function
Use the STARTER to assign an IP address and a name to the Ethernet interface.
● Connect the programming device (PG/PC) and the Control Unit using a crosslink
Ethernet cable.
● Switch on the Control Unit.
● Open STARTER.
● Either create a new project or open an existing one.
● A search is performed for available nodes in Ethernet via Project -> Accessible nodes or
the "Accessible nodes" button.
● The SINAMICS drive object is detected and displayed as a bus node with IP address
169.254.11.22 and without name.
Commissioning Manual
Commissioning Manual, (IH1), 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AF00-0BP1
59
Commissioning
2.2 STARTER commissioning tool
● Mark the bus node entry and select the displayed menu item "Edit Ethernet node" with
the right mouse button.
● In the following "Edit Ethernet node" screen, enter the device name for the Ethernet
interface and click the "Assign name" button. For the IP configuration, enter the subnet
mask (255.255.0.0). Then click the "Assign IP configuration" button and close the mask.
● The "Update (F5)" button displays the IP address and name in the entry for the bus node.
If not, close the "Accessible nodes" screen and perform another search for accessible
nodes.
● If the Ethernet interface is displayed as bus node, mark the entry and click the "Accept"
button.
● The SINAMICS drive is displayed as drive object in the project tree.
● Further configurations can be performed for the drive object.
● Click "Connect to target system" and load the project to the Control Unit's memory card
with Target system -> Load -> To target device.
Note
The IP address and device name are stored on the memory card of the Control Unit in a
non-volatile fashion.
Parameterizing the interface using the expert list
● Assign the "Name of Station" using parameter p8900
● Assign the "IP Address of Station" using parameter p8901 (factory setting 169.254.11.22)
● Assign the "Default Gateway of Station" using parameter p8902 (factory setting 0.0.0.0)
● Assign the "Subnet Mask of Station" using parameter p8903 (factory setting 255.255.0.0)
● Activate the configuration with p8905 = 1
● Activate the configuration and save with p8905 = 2
2.2.4
Activating online operation: STARTER via PROFINET IO
Description
Online operation with PROFINET IO is implemented using TCP/IP.
Preconditions
● STARTER commissioning tool from version 4.1.5 or higher
● Communication Board CBE 20 in the Control Unit
Commissioning Manual
60
Commissioning Manual, (IH1), 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AF00-0BP1
Commissioning
2.2 STARTER commissioning tool
STARTER via PROFINET IO (example)
(WKHUQHW
LQWHUIDFH
67$57(5
(WKHUQHW
DGDSWHU
Figure 2-6
&RQWURO
8QLW
3*3&
(WKHUQHW
'HYLFH
,3
STARTER via PROFINET (example)
Procedure for activating online mode with PROFINET
1. Setting the IP address in Windows XP
The programming device (PG/PC) is assigned a fixed, free IP address.
2. Settings in the STARTER commissioning tool
3. Select online operation in the STARTER commissioning tool.
Setting the IP address in Windows XP
On the desktop, right-click on "Network environment" -> Properties -> double-click on
Network card and choose -> Properties -> Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) -> Properties -> Enter
the freely-selectable addresses.
Figure 2-7
Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) properties
Commissioning Manual
Commissioning Manual, (IH1), 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AF00-0BP1
61
Commissioning
2.2 STARTER commissioning tool
Settings in STARTER
The following settings are required in STARTER for communication via PROFINET:
● Tools -> Set PG/PC Interface...
Figure 2-8
Setting the PG/PC Interface
Commissioning Manual
62
Commissioning Manual, (IH1), 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AF00-0BP1
Commissioning
2.2 STARTER commissioning tool
● Right-click Drive unit -> Target device -> Online access -> Module address
Figure 2-9
Setting online access
Commissioning Manual
Commissioning Manual, (IH1), 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AF00-0BP1
63
Commissioning
2.2 STARTER commissioning tool
Assigning the IP address and the name
Note
ST (Structured Text) conventions must be satisfied for the name assignment of IO devices in
PROFINET (SINAMICS components). The names must be unique within PROFINET.
The characters "-" and "." are not permitted in the name of an IO device.
Assignment with STARTER, "Accessible nodes" function
Use the STARTER to assign an IP address and a name to the PROFINET interface (e.g.
CBE20).
● Connect the programming device via Ethernet cable to the Control Unit.
● Switch on the Control Unit.
● Open STARTER.
● A search is performed for available nodes in PROFINET via Project -> Accessible nodes
or the "Accessible nodes" button.
● The Control Unit as SINAMICS drive object with CBE20 is detected as node with IP
address 0.0.0.0 and is displayed without name.
● Mark the bus node entry and select the displayed menu item "Edit Ethernet node" with
the right mouse button.
● In the following "Edit Ethernet node" screen, enter the device name for the PROFINET
interface and click the "Assign name" button. Enter the IP address (e.g. 192.168.0.2) in
the IP configuration and specify the subnet screen (e.g. 255.255.255.0). Then click the
"Assign IP configuration" button. Close the screen.
● The "Update (F5)" button displays the IP address and name in the entry for the bus node.
If not, close the "Accessible nodes" screen and perform another search for accessible
nodes.
● If the PROFINET interface is displayed as bus node, mark the entry and click the
"Accept" button.
● The SINAMICS drive with CBE20 is displayed as drive object in the project tree.
● Further configurations can be performed for the drive object.
● Click "Connect to target system" and load the project to the Control Unit's memory card
with Target system -> Load -> To target device.
Note
The IP address and device name for the Control Unit are stored on the memory card
(non-volatile).
Commissioning Manual
64
Commissioning Manual, (IH1), 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AF00-0BP1
Commissioning
2.3 Basic Operator Panel 20 (BOP20)
2.3
Basic Operator Panel 20 (BOP20)
Short description
The Basic Operator Panel 20 (BOP20) is a basic operator panel with six keys and a two-line
display unit with background lighting. The BOP20 can be plugged onto the SINAMICS
Control Unit and operated.
The BOP20 supports the following functions:
● Input and changing parameters
● Display of operating modes, parameters and alarms
● Display and acknowledgement of faults
● Powering-up/powering-down while commissioning
● Simulation of a motorized potentiometer
2.3.1
Operation with BOP20 (Basic Operator Panel 20)
2.3.1.1
General information about the BOP20
The BOP20 can be used to switch on and switch off drives during the commissioning phase
as well as display and modify parameters. Faults can be diagnosed as well as
acknowledged.
The BOP20 is snapped onto the Control Unit. To do this, the blanking cover must be
removed (for additional notes on installation, see the Manual).
Overview of displays and keys
'ULYH1R
581
6
3
Figure 2-10
&
Overview of displays and keys
Commissioning Manual
Commissioning Manual, (IH1), 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AF00-0BP1
65
Commissioning
2.3 Basic Operator Panel 20 (BOP20)
Information on the displays
Table 2- 2
LED
Display
Meaning
top left
2 positions
The active drive object of the BOP is displayed here.
RUN
Lit if at least one drive in the drive line-up is in the RUN state (in operation).
The displays and key operations always refer to this drive object.
RUN is also displayed via bit r0899.2 of the drive.
top right
2 positions
The following is displayed in this field:

More than 6 digits: Characters that are still present but are invisible (e.g. "r2" ––> 2
characters to the right are invisible, "L1" ––> 1 character to the left is invisible)

Faults: Selects/displays other drives with faults

Designation of BICO inputs (bi, ci)

Designation of BICO outputs (bo, co)

Source object of a BICO interconnection to a drive object different than the active one.
S
Is (bright) if at least one parameter was changed and the value was not transferred into the nonvolatile memory.
P
Is lit (bright) if, for a parameter, the value only becomes effective after pressing the P key.
C
Is light (bright) if at least one parameter was changed and the calculation for consistent data
management has still not been initiated.
Below, 6 digit
Displays, e.g. parameters, indices, faults and alarms.
Commissioning Manual
66
Commissioning Manual, (IH1), 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AF00-0BP1
Commissioning
2.3 Basic Operator Panel 20 (BOP20)
Information on the keys
Table 2- 3
Key
Keys
Name
Meaning
ON
Powering up the drives for which the command "ON/OFF1" should come from the BOP.
OFF
Powering down the drives for which the commands "ON/OFF1", "OFF2" or "OFF3" should come
from the BOP.
Binector output r0019.0 is set using this key.
The binector outputs r0019.0, .1 and .2 are simultaneously reset when this key is pressed. After
the key has been released, binector outputs r0019.1 and .2 are again set to a "1" signal.
Note:
The effectiveness of these keys can be defined by appropriately parameterizing the BICO (e.g.
using these keys it is possible to simultaneously control all of the existing drives).
Functions
The significance of these keys depends on the actual display.
Note:
The effectiveness of this key to acknowledge faults can be defined using the appropriate BiCo
parameterization.
Parameter
The significance of these keys depends on the actual display.
If this key is pressed for 3 s, the "Copy RAM to ROM" function is executed. The "S" displayed on
the BOP disappears.
Raise
The keys depend on the current display and are used to either raise or lower values.
Lower
Commissioning Manual
Commissioning Manual, (IH1), 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AF00-0BP1
67
Commissioning
2.3 Basic Operator Panel 20 (BOP20)
BOP20 functions
Table 2- 4
Functions
Name
Description
Backlighting
The backlighting can be set using p0007 in such a way that it switches itself off automatically
after the set time if no actions are carried out.
Changeover active drive
From the BOP perspective the active drive is defined using p0008 or using the keys "FN" and
"Arrow up".
Units
The units are not displayed on the BOP.
Access level
The access level for the BOP is defined using p0003.
The higher the access level, the more parameters can be selected using the BOP.
Parameter filter
Using the parameter filter in p0004, the available parameters can be filtered corresponding to
their particular function.
Selecting the operating
display
Actual values and setpoints are displayed on the operating display.
User parameter list
Using the user parameter list in p0013, parameters can be selected for access.
Unplug while voltage is
present
The BOP can be withdrawn and inserted under voltage.
The operating display can be set using p0006.

The ON and OFF keys have a function.
When withdrawing, the drives are stopped.
Once the BOP has been inserted, the drives must be switched on again.
.

ON and OFF keys have no function
Withdrawing and inserting has no effect on the drives.
Actuating keys
The following applies to the "P" and "FN" keys:

When used in a combination with another key, "P" or "FN" must be pressed first and then
the other key.
Commissioning Manual
68
Commissioning Manual, (IH1), 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AF00-0BP1
Commissioning
2.3 Basic Operator Panel 20 (BOP20)
Overview of important parameters (see SINAMICS S120/S150 List Manual)
All drive objects
● p0005 BOP operating display selection
● p0006 BOP operating display mode
● p0013 BOP user-defined list
● p0971 Drive object, save parameters
Drive object, Control Unit
● r0002 Control Unit status display
● p0003 BOP access level
● p0004 BOP display filter
● p0007 BOP background lighting
● p0008 BOP drive object selection
● p0009 Device commissioning, parameter filter
● p0011 BOP password input (p0013)
● p0012 BOP password confirmation (p0013)
● r0019 CO/BO: Control word, BOP
● p0977 Save all parameters
Other drive objects (e.g. SERVO, VECTOR, X_INF, TM41 etc.)
● p0010 Commissioning parameter filter
Commissioning Manual
Commissioning Manual, (IH1), 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AF00-0BP1
69
Commissioning
2.3 Basic Operator Panel 20 (BOP20)
2.3.1.2
Displays and using the BOP20
Features
● Operating display
● Changing the active drive object
● Displaying/changing parameters
● Displaying/acknowledging faults and alarms
● Controlling the drive using the BOP20
Operating display
The operating display for each drive object can be set using p0005 and p0006. Using the
operating display, you can change into the parameter display or to another drive object. The
following functions are possible:
● Changing the active drive object
– Press key "FN" and "Arrow up" -> the drive object number at the top left flashes
– Select the required drive object using the arrow keys
– Acknowledge using the "P" key
● Parameter display
– Press the "P" key.
– The required parameters can be selected using the arrow keys.
– Press the "FN" key -> parameter r0000 is displayed
– Press the "P" key -> changes back to the operating display
Commissioning Manual
70
Commissioning Manual, (IH1), 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AF00-0BP1
Commissioning
2.3 Basic Operator Panel 20 (BOP20)
Parameter display
The parameters are selected in the BOP20 using the number. The parameter display is
reached from the operating display by pressing the "P" key. Parameters can be searched for
using the arrow keys. The parameter value is displayed by pressing the "P" key again. You
can toggle between the drive objects by simultaneously pressing the keys "FN" and the
arrow keys. You can toggle between r0000 and the parameter that was last displayed by
pressing the "FN" key in the parameter display.
6WDWXVLQGLFDWRU
RU
9DOXHGLVSOD\
3DUDPHWHUGLVSOD\
3$GMXVWDEOHSDUDPHWHUV
LQLQGH[HG
U'LVSOD\
SDUDPHWHUV
%LQHFWRUSDUDPHWHUV
ELELQHFWRULQSXW
ERELQHFWRURXWSXW
FLFRQQHFWRULQSXW
FRFRQQHFWRURXWSXW
<RXFDQVZLWFKEHWZHHQUDQGWKHSDUDPHWHUWKDWZDVODVWGLVSOD\HGE\SUHVVLQJWKH
)QNH\LQWKHSDUDPHWHUGLVSOD\
Figure 2-11
Parameter display
Commissioning Manual
Commissioning Manual, (IH1), 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AF00-0BP1
71
Commissioning
2.3 Basic Operator Panel 20 (BOP20)
Value display
To switch from the parameter display to the value display, press the "P" key. In the value
display, the values of the adjustable parameters can be increased and decreased using the
arrow. The cursor can be selected using the "FN" key.
'HFLPDOQXPEHU
HJS
,QWHJHUQXPEHU
HJS
'HFLPDOQXPEHU
HJU
7LPH
HJU
KPVPV
++H[DGHFLPDO
QXPEHU
[$)%
&KDQJHWKHFRPSOHWHQXPEHU
&XUVRU
Figure 2-12
&KDQJHDQLQGLYLGXDOGLJLW
'LVSOD\RULJLQDOYDOXH
Value display
Commissioning Manual
72
Commissioning Manual, (IH1), 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AF00-0BP1
Commissioning
2.3 Basic Operator Panel 20 (BOP20)
Example: Changing a parameter
Precondition: The appropriate access level is set
(for this particular example, p0003 = 3).
[
3DUDPHWHUGLVSOD\
[
[
9DOXHGLVSOD\
Figure 2-13
Example: Changing p0013[4] from 0 to 300
Commissioning Manual
Commissioning Manual, (IH1), 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AF00-0BP1
73
Commissioning
2.3 Basic Operator Panel 20 (BOP20)
Example: Changing binector and connector input parameters
For the binector input p0840[0] (OFF1) of drive object 2 binector output r0019.0 of the
Control Unit (drive object 1) is interconnected.
[
Figure 2-14
Example: Changing indexed binector parameters
Commissioning Manual
74
Commissioning Manual, (IH1), 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AF00-0BP1
Commissioning
2.3 Basic Operator Panel 20 (BOP20)
2.3.1.3
Fault and alarm displays
Displaying faults
$FNQRZOHGJH
DOOIDXOWV
))DXOW
)DXOWIURPWKH
GULYHREMHFW
1H[W
IDXOW
0RUHWKDQRQHIDXOW
IURPWKHGULYHREMHFW
$IDXOWIURPDGULYHREMHFWRWKHU
WKDQWKHDFWLYHRQH
'ULYH1RIODVKHV
0RUHWKDQRQHIDXOWIURPWKH
DFWLYHGULYHREMHFWDQGIURP
DQRWKHU
GULYHREMHFW
Figure 2-15
&KDQJH
Faults
Displaying alarms
$$ODUP
1HZDODUPVRUDODUPVDUH
SUHVHQWDQGQREXWWRQKDVEHHQ
SUHVVHG
IRUDSSUR[VHFRQGV
$ODUPVDUH
DXWRPDWLFDOO\F\FOHGWKURXJK
0RUHWKDQRQHDODUP
IURPWKHDFWLYHGULYH
DQGIURPDQRWKHU
GULYH
DIWHUVHFRQGV
DIWHUVHFRQGV
DIWHUVHFRQGV
Figure 2-16
Alarms
Commissioning Manual
Commissioning Manual, (IH1), 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AF00-0BP1
75
Commissioning
2.3 Basic Operator Panel 20 (BOP20)
2.3.1.4
Controlling the drive using the BOP20
Description
When commissioning the drive, it can be controlled via the BOP20. A control word is
available on the Control Unit drive object (r0019) for this purpose, which can be
interconnected with the appropriate binector inputs of e.g. the drive.
The interconnections do not function if a standard PROFIdrive telegram was selected as its
interconnection cannot be disconnected.
Table 2- 5
Bit (r0019)
BOP20 control word
Name
Example, interconnection parameters
0
ON / OFF (OFF1)
p0840
1
No coast down/coast down (OFF2)
p0844
2
No fast stop/fast stop (OFF3)
p0848
Note:
For simple commissioning, only bit 0 should be interconnected. When interconnecting bits 0 ... 2,
then the system is powered-down according to the following priority: OFF2, OFF3, OFF1.
7
Acknowledge fault (0 -> 1)
p2102
13
Motorized potentiometer, raise
p1035
14
Motorized potentiometer, lower
p1036
Commissioning Manual
76
Commissioning Manual, (IH1), 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AF00-0BP1
Commissioning
2.3 Basic Operator Panel 20 (BOP20)
2.3.2
Important functions via BOP20
Description
Using the BOP20, the following functions can be executed via parameters that support you
when handling projects:
● Restoring the factory settings
● Copy RAM to ROM
● Identification via LED
● Acknowledging faults
Restoring the factory settings
The factory setting of the complete device can be established in the drive object CU.
● p0009 = 30
● p0976 = 1
Copy RAM to ROM
You can initiate the saving of all parameters to the non-volatile memory (memory card) in the
drive object CU:
● Press the P key for 3 seconds,
or
● p0009 = 0
● p0977 = 1
NOTICE
This parameter is not accepted if an identification run (e.g. motor data identification) has
been selected on a drive.
Identification via LED
The main component of a drive object (e.g. Motor Module) can be identified using the index
of p0124. The "Ready" LED on the component starts to flash. The index matches the index
in p0107. The drive object type can be identified via this parameter.
On the drive objects, the components can also be identified via the following parameters:
● p0124 Power unit detection via LED
● p0144 Voltage Sensing Module detection via LED
● p0144 Sensor Module detection via LED
Acknowledging faults
To acknowledge all the faults that have been rectified, press the Fn key.
Commissioning Manual
Commissioning Manual, (IH1), 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AF00-0BP1
77
Commissioning
2.4 Creating a project in STARTER
2.4
Creating a project in STARTER
2.4.1
Creating a project offline
To create a project offline, you need the PROFIBUS address, the device type, e.g.
SINAMICS S120, and the device version, e.g. firmware version 4.3 or higher.
Table 2- 6
Example of a sequence for creating a project in STARTER
What to do?
1.
Create a new project
How to do it?

The project is created offline and
loaded to the target system when
configuration is complete.
Operator action:
–

Comment
Menu "Project"--> New ...
User projects:
–
Projects already in the target directory
 Name: Project_1 (can be freely selected)
Type: Project
Storage location (path): Default (can be set as
required)
Commissioning Manual
78
Commissioning Manual, (IH1), 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AF00-0BP1
Commissioning
2.4 Creating a project in STARTER
What to do?
2.
Add individual drive
How to do it?
Operator action:
--> Double-click "Add individual drive unit".
Device type: SINAMICS S120 (can be selected)
Device version: 4.3 or higher (can be selected)
Address type: PROFIBUS/USS/PPI (can be selected)
Bus address: 37 (can be selected)
3.
Configure the drive unit.
Comment
Information about the bus
address:
The PROFIBUS address of the
Control Unit must be set for initial
commissioning.
Using the rotary coding switches
on the Control Unit, the address
can be set to a value between 1
and 126 and read via p0918. If
the coding switches are at "0"
(factory setting), the value can be
alternatively set between 1 and
126 using p0918.
Once you have created the project, you have to configure the drive unit. The following
sections provide some examples.
Commissioning Manual
Commissioning Manual, (IH1), 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AF00-0BP1
79
Commissioning
2.4 Creating a project in STARTER
2.4.2
Searching for a drive unit online
The drive unit must be connected with the programming device (PG/PC) via PROFIBUS or
PROFINET for the online search via PROFIBUS or PROFINET.
Table 2- 7
Sequence for searching for a drive unit in STARTER (example)
What to do?
1.
Create a new
project
How to do it?
Operator action:
Menu "Project"--> New with Wizard
Click "Find drive unit online".
1.1
Enter the project
data.
Project name: Project_1 (can be freely selected)
Author: Any
Comment: Any
Commissioning Manual
80
Commissioning Manual, (IH1), 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AF00-0BP1
Commissioning
2.4 Creating a project in STARTER
What to do?
How to do it?
2.
Set up the PG/PC
interface
Here, you can set up the PG/PC interface by clicking "Change and test".
3.
Insert drives
Here, you can search for nodes that have been accessed.
Commissioning Manual
Commissioning Manual, (IH1), 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AF00-0BP1
81
Commissioning
2.5 First commissioning, servo control mode, booksize format
What to do?
4.
Summary
How to do it?
You have now created the project.
-> Click "Complete".
5.
2.5
Configure the drive Once you have created the project, you have to configure the drive unit. The following
unit.
sections provide some examples.
First commissioning, servo control mode, booksize format
The example provided in this section explains all the configuration and parameter settings,
as well as the tests that are required for initial commissioning. Commissioning is carried out
using the STARTER commissioning tool.
Requirements for commissioning
1. The commissioning requirements have been met according to Section 1.1.
2. The check list - Table 1-1 or 1-2 from the Chapter Preparing for commissioning - has
been filled out and the points complied with.
3. The STARTER commissioning tool is installed and activated.
--> see the "Readme" file on the STARTER installation CD.
4. The power supply (24 V DC) is switched on.
Commissioning Manual
82
Commissioning Manual, (IH1), 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AF00-0BP1
Commissioning
2.5 First commissioning, servo control mode, booksize format
2.5.1
Task
1. Commission a drive system with the following components:
Table 2- 8
Component overview
Designation
Component
Order number
Closed-loop control and infeed
Control Unit 1
Control Unit 320-2DP
6SL3040-1MA00-0AA0
Active Line Module 1
Active Line Module 16 kW
6SL3130-7TE21-6AAx
Line filter package 16 kW
Line filter and line reactor
6SL3000-0FE21-6AAx
Drive 1
Motor Module 1
Single Motor Module 9 A
6SL3120-1TE21-0AAx
Sensor Module 1.1
SMC20
6SL3055-0AA00-5BAx
Motor 1
Synchronous motor
1FK7061–7AF7x–xxxx
Motor encoder 1
Incremental encoder sin/cos C/D
1 Vpp 2048 p/r
1FK7xxx–xxxxx–xAxx
Sensor Module 1.2
SMC20
6SL3055-0AA00-5BAx
External encoder
Incremental encoder
sin/cos 1 Vpp 4096 p/r
-
Motor Module 2
Single Motor Module 18 A
6SL3120-1TE21-8AAx
Motor 2
Induction motor
1PH7103–xNGxx–xLxx
Sensor Module 2
SMC20
6SL3055-0AA00-5BAx
Motor encoder 2
Incremental encoder sin/cos
1 Vpp 2048 p/r
1PH7xxx–xMxxx–xxxx
Drive 2
1. The enable signals for the infeed and the two drives must be transmitted via PROFIBUS.
● Telegram for the Active Line Module
Telegram 370: Infeed, 1 word
● Telegram for drive 1
Standard telegram 4: Speed control, 2 position encoders
● Enable signals for drive 2
Standard telegram 3: Speed control, 1 position encoder
Note
For more information about telegram types, see Function Manual SINAMICS S120 or
SINAMICS S120/S150 List Manual.
Commissioning Manual
Commissioning Manual, (IH1), 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AF00-0BP1
83
Commissioning
2.5 First commissioning, servo control mode, booksize format
2.5.2
Component wiring (example)
The following diagram shows a possible component configuration and wiring option. The
DRIVE-CLiQ wiring is highlighted in bold.
/
/
/
9'&
H[WHUQDO
'5,9(&/,4
;
;
;
(3
;
&RQWURO
8QLW
;
'2
$FWLYH
/LQH
0RGXOH
6LQJOH
0RWRU
0RGXOH
6LQJOH
0RWRU
0RGXOH
; ; ;
60& 60& 60&
;
;
;
H[W
9
/LQHFRQWDFWRU
',
&8
/LQHILOWHU
/LQHUHDFWRU
0RWRUFDEOH
Figure 2-17
(QFRGHU
FDEOH
Component wiring (example)
For more information on wiring and connecting the encoder system, see the Equipment
Manual.
Commissioning Manual
84
Commissioning Manual, (IH1), 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AF00-0BP1
Commissioning
2.5 First commissioning, servo control mode, booksize format
2.5.3
Signal flow of the commissioning example
/
/
/
$&7,9(,1)(('&21752/
>@
U
&ORVHPDLQ
FRQWDFWRU
5HFHLYHSURFHVVGDWD
67:
>@
S U
0DLQFRQWDFWRU
IHHGEDFNVLJQDO
>@
','2
;
DVRXWSXW
S /LQHFRQQHFWLRQ
9
S U
','2
;
S $FWLYH/LQH0RGXOH
6HQGSURFHVVGDWD
=6:
>@
,QIHHGUHDG\
>@ U
'&3'&1
Figure 2-18
Signal flow of the commissioning example - servo - Part 1
,QIHHGUHDG\
>@
S U
>@
'&3'&1
6(592&21752/
5HFHLYHSURFHVVGDWD
67:
6HQGSURFHVVGDWD
162//B%
67:
*B67:
*B67:
=6:
1,67B%
=6:
*B=6:
*B;,67
*B;,67
*B=6:
>@
>@
S>@
162//B%
0RWRU0RGXOH
S
S
S
0
a
6HWSRLQWFKDQQHO>@
6SHHG
FRQWUROOHU
*B;,67
*B;,67
>@
,QIHHGUHDG\
>@
U
S >@
6(592&21752/
5HFHLYHSURFHVVGDWD
67:
6HQGSURFHVVGDWD
162//B%
67:
*B;,67
=6:
1,67B%
=6:
*B=6:
*B;,67
*B;,67
>@
>@
S>@
162//B%
0RWRU0RGXOH
S
S
S
0
a
6HWSRLQWFKDQQHO>@
6SHHG
FRQWUROOHU
>@
Figure 2-19
Signal flow of the commissioning example - servo - Part 2
Commissioning Manual
Commissioning Manual, (IH1), 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AF00-0BP1
85
Commissioning
2.5 First commissioning, servo control mode, booksize format
2.5.4
Commissioning with STARTER (example)
The table below describes the steps for commissioning with STARTER.
Table 2- 9
Sequence for commissioning with STARTER (example)
What to do?
1.
Automatic
configuration
How to do it?
Comment
-
Operator action:
-> "Project" -> "Connect to target system"
-> Double-click "Automatic configuration".
-> Follow the instructions provided in the wizard.
Note:
When the factory setting is p7826 = 1, the firmware is automatically updated to the status on the memory card when a
configured DRIVE-CLiQ component is first booted. This may take several minutes and is indicated by the READY-LED on
the corresponding components flashing green/red and the Control Unit flashing orange (0.5 Hz). Once all updates have
been completed, the READY-LED on the Control Unit flashes orange at 2 Hz and the corresponding READY-LED on the
components flashes green/red at 2 Hz. For the firmware to be activated, a POWER ON must be carried out for the
components.
2.
Configure the infeed
The infeed must be configured.
-
Name of infeed -> Double-click "Configuration" -> Click
"Wizard"
2.1
Infeed wizard
The wizard displays the data determined automatically from
the electronic rating plate.
You can now set the line/DC link identification.
The device supply voltage must be entered; the rated line
frequency is automatically determined by the firmware.
If the line environment or DC
link components are
changed, line/DC link
identification should be
repeated.
"Line filter available" must be active.
With a booksize infeed, one of up to three line filter types can
be selected in the offered menu when this option is activated.
With a chassis infeed, only one AIM line filter suitable for the
infeed is automatically added with the above option.
PROFIBUS telegram type 370 must be installed.
Then the configuration for the infeed is completed.
3.
Configuring drives
The drives must be configured individually.
-
-> "Drives" -> Drive name -> Double-click "Configuration" ->
Click "Configure DDS"
3.1
Control structure
You can activate the function modules.
3.2
Power unit
The wizard displays the data determined automatically from
the electronic rating plate.
-
You can select the control type.
-
Caution
If the infeed is controlled by a different Control Unit, the "Ready" signal for the infeed r0863.0 must be interconnected with
drive parameter p0864 "Infeed ready" via a digital input/output. If this is not taken into account, the infeed may be
damaged.
3.3
Motor
The name of the motor (e.g. equipment marking) can be
entered.
Select standard motor from list: Yes
Select the motor type (see rating plate).
You can select a standard
motor from the motor list or
you can enter the motor data
manually. You can then
select the motor type.
Commissioning Manual
86
Commissioning Manual, (IH1), 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AF00-0BP1
Commissioning
2.5 First commissioning, servo control mode, booksize format
What to do?
3.4
Motor brakes
3.5
Motor data
How to do it?
Comment
Here, you can configure the brake and activate the "Extended
brake control" function module.
For more information, see
the Function Manual.
You can enter the motor data on the rating plate here.
If you do not enter any
mechanical data, it is
estimated on the basis of the
data on the rating plate.
Induction motors (rotary):
If known, mechanical data for the motor and drive train can be
entered.
Synchronous motors (rotary, permanent-magnet)
If known, the data for a PE spindle can be entered.
The equivalent circuit
diagram data is also
estimated on the basis of the
data on the rating plate or
determined by means of
automatic motor data
identification.
Caution
If the motor is replaced after transferring project data from the programming device to the drive, then before any data is
transferred again, the pulse frequency must be checked.
3.6
Encoder
Motor encoder (encoder 1):
Choose standard encoder from list: Yes
Select "2048, 1 Vpp, A/B C/D R"
External encoder (encoder 2):
rotary: Yes
Measuring system: "incremental sinusoidal/cosinusoidal"
Resolution: "4096"
Zero mark: "No zero marker"
If you are using an encoder
that is not in the list, you can
also enter the data
manually.
3.7
Process data
exchange
PROFIBUS telegram type 4 (drive 1) and 3 (drive 2) must be
selected.
-
3.8
Drive functions
Here, after entering the motor data the technological
application can be selected.
Your choice of application
influences the calculation for
the open-loop/closed-loop
control parameters.
3.9
Summary
The drive data can be copied to the clipboard for plant
documentation purposes and then added to a text program,
for example.
-
Note
The reference parameters and limit values can be protected from being automatically overwritten in the STARTER by
p0340 = 1: Drive -> Configuration-> Reference parameters / blocked list tab.
Commissioning Manual
Commissioning Manual, (IH1), 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AF00-0BP1
87
Commissioning
2.5 First commissioning, servo control mode, booksize format
What to do?
4.
Line contactor
How to do it?
Comment
The line contactor must be
controlled by the infeed_1
drive object.
Line contactor
p0728.8 = 1 Set DI/DO as output
p0738 =863.1 Line contactor ON
p0860 = 723.9 Line contactor, feedback signal
5.
6.
Save the parameters
on the device
The motor starts to
run.

Connect with target system (go online)

Target system -> Download to target device

Target system -> Copy from RAM to ROM
(save the data on the memory card)
The drives can be started via the control panel in STARTER.

Once the pulses for the infeed have been enabled the
line/DC link identification will be activated and carried out.
The infeed then switches to operational mode.
See function diagram [8934]
In the function --> Line
contactor control screen,
you can check that the
interconnection is correct.
Position cursor on drive unit
(SINAMICS S120) and rightclick.
For more information about
the control panel, see
Getting Started.
The control panel supplies
the control word 1 (STW1)
and speed setpoint 1
(NSOLL).
For more information about
line/DC link identification,
see the SINAMICS S120
Function Manual.
STARTER diagnosis options
Under "Component" -> Diagnosis -> Control/status words
● Control/status words
● Status parameters
● Missing enable signals
Commissioning Manual
88
Commissioning Manual, (IH1), 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AF00-0BP1
Commissioning
2.6 First commissioning control mode vector U/f in booksize format
2.6
First commissioning control mode vector U/f in booksize format
The example provided in this section explains all the configuration and parameter settings,
as well as the tests that are required for initial commissioning. Commissioning is carried out
using the STARTER commissioning tool.
Requirements for commissioning
1. The commissioning requirements have been met according to Section 1.1.
2. The check list - Table 1-1 or 1-2 from the Chapter Preparing for commissioning - has
been filled out and the points complied with.
3. The STARTER commissioning tool is installed and activated.
--> see the "Readme" file on the STARTER installation CD.
4. The power supply (24 V DC) is switched on.
2.6.1
Task
A drive, booksize format with vector U/f control mode with the following components is to be
commissioned for the first time:
Table 2- 10
Component overview
Designation
Component
Order number
Closed-loop control and infeed
Control Unit
Control Unit 320-2DP
6SL3040-1MA00-0AA0
Smart Line Module
Smart Line Module 10 kW
6SL3130-6AE21-0AAx
Line filter package 10 kW
Line filter and line reactor
6SL3130-0GE21-0AAx
Motor Module
Single Motor Module 5 A
6SL3120-1TE15-0AAx
Motor
Induction motor
1LA
Motor Module
Single Motor Module 5 A
6SL3120-1TE15-0AAx
Motor
Induction motor
1LA
Drive 1
Drive 2
The enable signals for the infeed and the drive should be realized via terminals.
Commissioning Manual
Commissioning Manual, (IH1), 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AF00-0BP1
89
Commissioning
2.6 First commissioning control mode vector U/f in booksize format
2.6.2
Component wiring (example)
The following diagram shows a possible component configuration and wiring option. The
DRIVE-CLiQ wiring is highlighted in bold.
/
/
/
9'&
H[WHUQDO
;
; (3
5G\
;
;
9'&
&RQWURO
8QLW
;
',
'2
9'&
6PDUW/LQH
0RGXOH
6LQJOH0RWRU
0RGXOH
6LQJOH0RWRU
0RGXOH
;
9
'LVDEOH
H[W
9
/LQHFRQWDFWRU
',
&8
/LQHILOWHU
/LQHUHDFWRU
0RWRU
FDEOH
Figure 2-20
Component wiring (example)
For more information on wiring and connecting the encoder system, see the Equipment
Manual.
Commissioning Manual
90
Commissioning Manual, (IH1), 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AF00-0BP1
Commissioning
2.6 First commissioning control mode vector U/f in booksize format
2.6.3
Signal flow of the commissioning example
;
9'&
H[WHUQDO
/
/
/
0
;
0
;
;
/LQHFRQQHFWLRQ
9
6PDUW/LQH0RGXOH
>@
>@
S U
(QDEOH
VLJQDOV
0RWRU
0RGXOHV
)L[HGVHWSRLQW
VHOHFWLRQ
>@
;
',
;
',
;
',
;
',
;
',
9HFWRU8I
>@
U
S U
$86
U
S U
$86
U
S U
$86
U
S U
2SHUDWLRQ
HQDEOHG
U
S U
S S U
',
;
IRUHDFKHQDEOH
S
S
S
S
U
6HWSRLQW
FKDQQHO
>@
;
5HDG\
ದ
0RWRU0RGXOH
0
a
5DPS
IXQFWLRQ
JHQHUDWRU
>@
6SHHG
FRQWUROOHU
0RWRU0RGXOH
S 3>'@
0
a
)L[HGVHWSRLQWV
>@
9HFWRU8I
Figure 2-21
Signal flow diagram of the example vector U/f control mode in the booksize format
Commissioning Manual
Commissioning Manual, (IH1), 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AF00-0BP1
91
Commissioning
2.6 First commissioning control mode vector U/f in booksize format
2.6.4
Commissioning with STARTER (example)
The table below describes the steps for commissioning the example using the STARTER
commissioning tool.
Table 2- 11
Sequence for commissioning with STARTER (example)
What to do?
1.
Automatic
configuration
How to do it?
Comment
Operator action:
-> "Project" -> "Connect to target system"
-> Double-click "Automatic configuration"
-> Follow the instructions provided in the wizard.
Note:
When the factory setting is p7826 = 1, the firmware is automatically updated to the status on the memory card when a
configured DRIVE-CLiQ component is first booted. This may take several minutes and is indicated by the READY-LED on
the corresponding components flashing green/red and the Control Unit flashing orange (0.5 Hz). Once all updates have
been completed, the READY-LED on the Control Unit flashes orange at 2 Hz and the corresponding READY-LED on the
components flashes green/red at 2 Hz. For the firmware to be activated, a POWER ON must be carried out for the
components.
2.
Configuring drives
The drives must be configured individually.
-> "Drives" -> Drive name -> Double-click "Configuration" ->
Click "Configure DDS"
2.1
Control structure
You can activate the function modules.
2.2
Power unit
The wizard displays the data determined automatically from the
electronic rating plate.
You can select the control type.
2.3
BICO power unit
Caution
If a sine-wave filter is
connected, it must be
activated here to prevent it
from being destroyed.
Infeed in operation
Control Unit: r0722.4 (digital input 4)
Caution
If the infeed is controlled from another Control Unit, then the ready signal of the infeed must be connected to parameter
p0864 "infeed ready" of the drive through a digital input/output. If this is not taken into account, the infeed may be
damaged.
2.4
Drive setting
2.5
Motor
You can select the motor standard (IEC/NEMA) and power unit
application (duty cycles).
The name of the motor (e.g. equipment marking) can be entered. You can select a standard
motor from the list of
motors or you can enter the
Select motor type "1LAx".
motor data yourself
manually. You can then
select the motor type.
Enter motor data: Yes
Commissioning Manual
92
Commissioning Manual, (IH1), 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AF00-0BP1
Commissioning
2.6 First commissioning control mode vector U/f in booksize format
What to do?
2.6
Motor data
How to do it?
You can enter the motor data from the rating plate here.
If known, mechanical data for the motor and drive train can be
entered.
Equivalent circuit diagram data: No
Comment
If you do not enter any
mechanical data, it is
estimated on the basis of
the data on the rating plate.
The equivalent circuit
diagram data is also
estimated on the basis of
the data on the rating plate
or determined by means of
automatic motor data
identification.
2.7
Motor brake
Here, you can configure the brake and activate the "Extended
brake control" function module.
For further information see
Function Manual.
2.8
Drive functions
You can choose the application and motor data identification
here.
Your choice of application
influences the calculation
for the open-loop/closedloop control parameters.
Motor data identification: "1"
When the pulses are
enabled, a one-off
identification run is carried
out. Current flows through
the motor which means that
it can align itself by up to a
quarter of a revolution.
Once the measurement is
complete, optimization with
rotating motor is carried out
the next time the pulses are
enabled.
2.9
Important
parameters
You must enter important parameters in accordance with the
relevant application.
Note, for example, the general mechanical conditions for the
drive train.
2.10
Summary
The drive data can be copied to the clipboard for system
documentation purposes and then pasted into a word processing
program, for example.
Note
The reference parameters and limit values in the STARTER can be protected from being automatically overwritten by
p0340 = 1. In the STARTER, you will find this under Drive -> Configuration-> Reference parameters / blocked list tab.
3.
Enable signals and The enable signals for the infeed and the two drives must be
BICO
realized via the digital inputs on the Control Unit.
interconnections
Commissioning Manual
Commissioning Manual, (IH1), 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AF00-0BP1
93
Commissioning
2.6 First commissioning control mode vector U/f in booksize format
What to do?
3.1
Line contactor
How to do it?

Comment
Line contactor
p0728.8 = 1 Set DI/DO as output
p0738 = 863.1 Activate line contactor
p0860 = 723.9 Line contactor, feedback signal
3.2
Enable Motor
Module

Enable signals for the Motor Module (drive_1)
p0840 = 722.0 ON/OFF1
The line contactor must be
controlled by the
Einspeisung_1 drive object.
The inputs/outputs are
located on the Control Unit.
See the function diagram
[8934]
See function diagram
[2501]
p0844 = 722.1 1. OFF2
p0845 = 1 2. OFF2
p0848 = 722.2 1. OFF3
p0849 = 1 2. OFF3
p0852 = 722.3 Enable operation
Commissioning Manual
94
Commissioning Manual, (IH1), 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AF00-0BP1
Commissioning
2.6 First commissioning control mode vector U/f in booksize format
What to do?
3.3
Ramp-function
generator
How to do it?

Ramp-function generator
p1140 = 1 Ramp-function generator enable
Comment
See function diagram
[3060]
p1141 = 1 Ramp-function generator start
p1142 = 1 Enable setpoint
3.4
Setpoint

Specify setpoint
p1001 = 40 Fixed setpoint 1
4
5
Save the
parameters on the
device

Connect target system (go online)

Target device -> Load to target device

Target device -> Copy from RAM to ROM
The motor starts to
run.
The drives can be started via the control panel in STARTER.



See function diagram
[3010]
Position cursor on drive
unit (SINAMICS S120) and
right-click.
For more information about
the control panel, see
Line/DC link identification will be carried out once
Getting Started.
the pulses for the infeed have been enabled and line/DC link
identification has been activated. The infeed then switches to During motor data
identification, a current
operational mode.
flows through the motor,
Once the pulses are enabled, a one-off motor data
which means that it can
identification run (if activated) is carried out.
align itself by up to a
quarter of a revolution.
When the pulses are enabled again, optimization with a
rotating motor (if activated) is carried out.
For more information about
line/DC link/motor data
identification, see the
Function Manual.
Commissioning Manual
Commissioning Manual, (IH1), 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AF00-0BP1
95
Commissioning
2.7 First commissioning, vector control mode in the chassis format
STARTER diagnosis options
Under "Component" -> Diagnosis -> Control/status words
● Control/status words
● Status parameters
● Missing enable signals
2.7
First commissioning, vector control mode in the chassis format
The example provided in this section explains all the configuration and parameter settings,
as well as the tests that are required for initial commissioning. Commissioning is carried out
using the STARTER commissioning tool.
Requirements for commissioning
1. The commissioning requirements have been met according to Section 1.1.
2. The check list - Table 1-1 or 1-2 from the Chapter Preparing for commissioning - has
been filled out and the points complied with.
3. The STARTER commissioning tool is installed and activated.
--> see the "Readme" file on the STARTER installation CD.
4. The power supply (24 V DC) is switched on.
Commissioning Manual
96
Commissioning Manual, (IH1), 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AF00-0BP1
Commissioning
2.7 First commissioning, vector control mode in the chassis format
2.7.1
Task
A drive in the chassis format in the vector control mode with the following components is to
be commissioned for the first time:
Table 2- 12
Component overview
Designation
Component
Order number
Closed-loop control and infeed
Control Unit
Control Unit 320-2DP
6SL3040-1MA00-0AA0
Active Line Module
Active Line Module 380 kW / 400 V 6SL3330–7TE36–1AAx
Active Interface Module
Active Interface Module
6SL3300–7TE38–4AAx
Motor Module
Motor Module 380 A
6SL3320–1TE33–8AAx
Motor
Induction motor
Type: 1LA8
rated voltage = 400 V
rated current = 345 A
rated power = 200 kW
rated power factor = 0.86
rated frequency = 50.00 Hz
rated speed = 989 rpm
cooling type = natural cooling
HTL encoder, 1024 p/r, A/B, R
Drive 1

Without brake

With encoder
Drive 2
Motor Module
Motor Module 380 A
6SL3320–1TE33–8AAx
Motor
Induction motor
Type: 1LA8
rated voltage = 400 V
rated current = 345 A
rated power = 200 kW
rated power factor = 0.86
rated frequency = 50.00 Hz
rated speed = 989 rpm
cooling type = natural cooling
HTL encoder, 1024 p/r, A/B, R

Without brake

With encoder
The enable signals for the infeed and the drive should be realized via terminals.
Commissioning Manual
Commissioning Manual, (IH1), 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AF00-0BP1
97
Commissioning
2.7 First commissioning, vector control mode in the chassis format
2.7.2
Component wiring (example)
The following diagram shows a possible component configuration and wiring option. The
DRIVE-CLiQ wiring is highlighted in bold.
/
/
/
$&
9
H[WHUQDO
/
'&
9
H[WHUQDO
1
0
'5,9(&/,4
;
;
&RQWURO
8QLW
'3
;
;
;;
;
$FWLYH
,QWHUIDFH
0RGXOH
;
;
$FWLYH
/LQH
0RGXOH
;
;
;
0RWRU
0RGXOH
0RWRU
0RGXOH
'&FRQQHFWLRQ
'&3'&1
;
7HPS
7HPS
;
7HPS
7HPS
˽
Figure 2-22
; ;
60& 60&
;;
; ;
;
˽
Component wiring (example)
1) X500 at the Voltage Sensing Module
For more information on wiring and connecting the encoder system, see the Equipment
Manual.
Commissioning Manual
98
Commissioning Manual, (IH1), 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AF00-0BP1
Commissioning
2.7 First commissioning, vector control mode in the chassis format
2.7.3
Signal flow of the commissioning example
;
9
H[WHUQDO
(QDEOH
VLJQDOV
/LQH
0RGXOHV
;
/
/
/
0
0
;
;
;
',
;
',
/LQHFRQQHFWLRQ
$&7,9(,1)(('&21752/
$FWLYH,QWHUIDFH0RGXOH
>@
>@
U
S U
$86
U
S U
$86
$FWLYH/LQH0RGXOH
>@
(QDEOH
VLJQDOV
0RWRU
0RGXOHV
)L[HGVHWSRLQW
6HOHFWLRQRI
>@
;
',
;
',
;
',
;
',
;
',
,QIHHGUHDG\
U
>@
S U
9HNWRU&RQWURO
>@
U
S U
$86
U
S U
$86
U
S U
$86
U
S U
2SHUDWLRQ
HQDEOHG
U
S U
S S IRUHDFKHQDEOH
S
S
S
S
U
6HWSRLQW
FKDQQHO
>@
ದ
0RWRU0RGXOH
0
a
5DPS
IXQFWLRQ
JHQHUDWRU
>@
6SHHG
FRQWUROOHU
0RWRU0RGXOH
S 3>'@
0
a
)L[HGVHWSRLQWV
>@
9HNWRU&RQWURO
Figure 2-23
Signal flow of the commissioning example chassis
Commissioning Manual
Commissioning Manual, (IH1), 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AF00-0BP1
99
Commissioning
2.7 First commissioning, vector control mode in the chassis format
2.7.4
Commissioning with STARTER (example)
The table below describes the steps for commissioning the example with STARTER.
Table 2- 13
Sequence for commissioning with STARTER (example)
What to do?
1.
Automatic
configuration
How to do it?
Comment
Operator action:
-> "Project"--> "Connect to target system"
-> Double-click "Automatic configuration"
-> Follow the instructions provided in the wizard.
STARTER then automatically switches to offline
mode.
The DRIVE-CLiQ topology is
determined and the electronic
rating plates are read. The data is
then transferred to STARTER.
The next steps are carried out
offline.
Note:
When the factory setting is p7826 = 1, the firmware is automatically updated to the status on the memory card when a
configured DRIVE-CLiQ component is first booted. This may take a few minutes and is indicated by the READY-LED on
the corresponding components flashing green/red and the Control Unit flashing orange (0.5 Hz). Once all updates have
been completed, the READY-LED on the Control Unit flashes orange at 2 Hz and the corresponding READY-LED on the
components flashes green/red at 2 Hz. For the firmware to be activated, a POWER ON must be carried out for the
components.
2.
Configure the infeed
The infeed must be configured.
Name of infeed -> Double-click "Configuration" ->
Click "Wizard"
2.1
Infeed wizard
The wizard displays the data determined
automatically from the electronic rating plate.
You can now set the line/DC link identification.
The device supply voltage must be entered; the
rated line frequency is automatically
determined/specified for this by the firmware.
If the network environment or
components in the DC link change,
the line/DC link identification
should be carried out again.
"Line filter available" must be active.
With a booksize infeed, one of up to three line filter
types can be selected in the offered menu when this
option is activated.
With a chassis infeed, only one AIM line filter
suitable for the infeed is automatically added with the
above option.
PROFIBUS telegram type 370 must be installed.
This completes the configuration for the infeed.
3.
Configuring drives
The drives must be configured individually.
-> "Drives" -> Drive name -> Double-click
"Configuration" -> Click "Configure DDS"
3.1
Control structure
You can activate the function modules.
You can select the control type.
Commissioning Manual
100
Commissioning Manual, (IH1), 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AF00-0BP1
Commissioning
2.7 First commissioning, vector control mode in the chassis format
What to do?
3.2
Power unit
How to do it?
The wizard displays the data determined
automatically from the electronic rating plate.
Comment
Caution
If a sine-wave filter is connected,
then it must be activated here as
otherwise it could be destroyed!
Caution
If the infeed is controlled by a different Control Unit, the "Ready" signal for the infeed r0863.0 must be interconnected with
drive parameter p0864 "Infeed ready" via a digital input/output. If this is not taken into account, the infeed may be
damaged.
3.3
Drive setting
You can select the motor standard (IEC/NEMA) and
power unit application (duty cycles).
3.4
Motor
The name of the motor (e.g. equipment marking) can You can select a standard motor
be entered.
from the list of motors or you can
enter the motor data yourself. You
Enter motor data: Yes
can then select the motor type.
Select motor type "1LA8"
3.5
Motor data
You can enter the motor data on the rating plate
here.
If known, mechanical data for the motor and drive
train can be entered.
Equivalent circuit diagram data: No
3.6
Motor brake
3.7
Encoder
Drive functions
The equivalent circuit diagram data
is also estimated on the basis of
the data on the rating plate or
determined by means of automatic
motor data identification.
Here, you can configure the brake and activate the
"Extended brake control" function module.
For more information, see the
Function Manual.
Choose standard encoder from list: Yes
If you are using an encoder that is
not in the list, you can also enter
the data.
Choose "1024 HTL A/B R to X521/X531".
3.8
If you do not enter any mechanical
data, it is estimated on the basis of
the data on the rating plate.
You can choose the application and motor data
identification here.
Motor data identification: "1"
Your choice of application
influences the calculation for the
open-loop/closed-loop control
parameters.
When the pulses are enabled, a
single motor data identification run
is carried out. Current flows
through the motor which means
that it can align itself by up to a
quarter of a revolution. Once the
measurement is complete,
optimization with rotating motor is
carried out the next time the pulses
are enabled.
3.9
Important parameters
You must enter important parameters in accordance
with the relevant application.
Note, for example, the general mechanical
conditions for the drive train.
Commissioning Manual
Commissioning Manual, (IH1), 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AF00-0BP1
101
Commissioning
2.7 First commissioning, vector control mode in the chassis format
What to do?
3.10
Summary
How to do it?
Comment
The drive data can be copied to the clipboard for
plant documentation purposes and then added to a
text program, for example.
Note
The reference parameters and limit values in the STARTER can be protected from being automatically overwritten by
p0340 = 1. In the STARTER, you will find this under Drive -> Configuration-> Reference parameters / blocked list tab.
4.
4.1
Enable signals and
BICO interconnections
The enable signals for the infeed and the two drives
must be realized via the digital inputs on the Control
Unit.
Active Line Module

Enable signals for the Active Line Module
Note:
If an Active Line Module is
installed, the same signal source
must not be used to enable both
the infeed and the drive.
See function diagram [8920]
p0840 = 722.4 ON/OFF1
p0844 = 722.5 OFF2
p0852 = 722.6 Enable operation
4.2
Enable Motor Module

Enable signals for the Motor Module (drive_1)
See function diagram [2501]
p0840 = 722.0 ON/OFF1
p0844 = 722.1 1. OFF2
p0845 = 1 2. OFF2
p0848 = 722.2 1. OFF3
p0849 = 1 2. OFF3
p0852 = 722.3 Enable operation
p0864 = 863.0 Infeed operation
Commissioning Manual
102
Commissioning Manual, (IH1), 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AF00-0BP1
Commissioning
2.7 First commissioning, vector control mode in the chassis format
What to do?
4.3
Ramp-function
generator
How to do it?

Ramp-function generator
Comment
See function diagram [3060]
p1140 = 1 Ramp-function generator enable
p1141 = 1 Ramp-function generator start
p1142 = 1 Enable setpoint
4.4
Setpoint

Specify setpoint
p1001 = 0 Fixed setpoint 1
p1002 = 40 Fixed setpoint 2
p1020 = r0722 Fixed speed setpoint selection
A setpoint of 0 (0 signal) or 40 (1
signal) is defaulted via digital input
7. This setpoint is then applied to
the main setpoint p1070.
See function diagram [3010]
r1024 = p1070 Fixed setpoint active
5.
Load parameters to
device

Connect with target system (go online)

Target device –> Load to target device
Position cursor on drive unit and
right-click.
Commissioning Manual
Commissioning Manual, (IH1), 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AF00-0BP1
103
Commissioning
2.7 First commissioning, vector control mode in the chassis format
What to do?
How to do it?
Comment
6.
Motor temperature
Thermistor selection: via Motor Module (11)
Temperature sensor type: KTY84 (2)
Response to overtemperature: alarm and fault
(no reduction of Imax)
Fault message for thermistor failure: ON
Deceleration time: 0.100 s
Alarm threshold: 120.0° C
Fault threshold: 155.0° C
7.
Save the parameters
on the device
Target device -> Copy from RAM to ROM
Position cursor on drive unit and
right-click.
8.
The motor starts to
run.
The drives can be started via the control panel in
STARTER.
For more information about the
control panel, see Getting Started.

Line/DC link identification will be carried out once
the pulses for the infeed have been enabled and
line/DC link identification has been activated. The
infeed then switches to operational mode.

When the pulses are enabled, a one-off motor
data identification run (if activated) is carried out.

When the pulses are enabled again, optimization
with a rotating motor (if activated) is carried out.
During motor data identification, a
current flows through the motor,
which means that it can align itself
by up to a quarter of a revolution.
For more information about line/DC
link/motor data identification, see
the SINAMICS S120 Function
Manual.
Diagnostics parameters (see the SINAMICS S120/S150 List Manual)
● r0002 Infeed/drive operating display
● r0046 Missing enable signals (for more information, see "Diagnostics")
Commissioning Manual
104
Commissioning Manual, (IH1), 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AF00-0BP1
Commissioning
2.8 First commissioning, control mode vector AC Drive in the booksize format
2.8
First commissioning, control mode vector AC Drive in the booksize
format
The example provided in this section explains all the configuration and parameter settings,
as well as the tests that are required for initial commissioning. Commissioning is carried out
using the STARTER commissioning tool.
Requirements for commissioning
1. The commissioning requirements have been met according to Section 1.1.
2. The check list - Table 1-1 or 1-2 from the Chapter Preparing for commissioning - has
been filled out and the points complied with.
2.8.1
Task
1. A drive unit is to be commissioned (operating mode vector, closed-loop speed control),
without DRIVE-CLiQ and without speed encoder with the following components:
Table 2- 14
Component overview
Designation
Component
Order number
Control Unit
Control Unit 310-2DP
6SL3040-1LA00-0AA0
Operator Panel
Basic Operator Panel BOP20
6SL3055-0AA00-4BAx
Power Module
Power Module 340
6SL3210-1SB14-xxxx
Motor
Induction motor
(without DRIVE-CLiQ interface)
1LA7
Closed-loop control
Infeed and drive
2. Commissioning is performed using the BOP20.
3. The function keys on the BOP20 must be parameterized so that the ON/OFF signal and
speed settings can be defined via these keys.
Commissioning Manual
Commissioning Manual, (IH1), 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AF00-0BP1
105
Commissioning
2.8 First commissioning, control mode vector AC Drive in the booksize format
2.8.2
Component wiring (example)
The following diagram shows a possible component configuration and wiring option.
/
/
/
;
&RQWURO
8QLW
;
3RZHU0RGXOH
/LQHUHDFWRU
/LQHILOWHU
0RWRUFDEOH
Figure 2-24
Component wiring (example)
For more information on wiring, see the Equipment Manual.
Commissioning Manual
106
Commissioning Manual, (IH1), 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AF00-0BP1
Commissioning
2.8 First commissioning, control mode vector AC Drive in the booksize format
2.8.3
Quick commissioning using the BOP (example)
Table 2- 15
Quick commissioning for a vector drive without a DRIVE-CLiQ interface
Procedure
Description
Factory
setting
Restore the drive to the factory setting:
1.
p0009 = 30
Device commissioning parameter filter *
1
0 Ready
1 Device configuration
30 Parameter reset
2.
p0976 = 1
Reset and load all parameters
0
0 Not active
1 Start restoring all parameters to their factory settings
Wait approx. 15 sec. When ready, the BOP display shows = 35 and the RDY-LED is green. P0009 is automatically set to
1, p0976 to 0.
Note:
As soon as the RDY-LED is green again, the factory setting has been completed and commissioning can start.
3.
p0009 = 1
Device commissioning parameter filter *
1
0 Ready
1 Device configuration
30 Parameter reset
4.
p0097 = 2
Select drive object type *
0
0 No selection
1 Drive object type SERVO
2 Drive object type VECTOR
5.
p0009 = 0
Device commissioning parameter filter *
1
0 Ready
1 Device configuration
Note:
Wait approx. 10 sec. The basic configuration is saved once the RDY lights green. In order to transfer this state into ROM,
press the "p" until the display flashes. When the flashing stops, the RDY changes from orange to green and the transfer
has been completed. Alarm A07991 indicates that the motor data identification function has been activated at drive DO 2.
The drive parameters are entered:
6.
DO = 2
Select drive object (DO) = 2 ( = VECTOR)
1
1 Expert list of the CU
2 Expert list of the drive
To select a drive object (DO), simultaneously press the Fn key and the arrow up
key.
The selected drive object is displayed at the top left.
7.
p0010 = 1
Drive, commissioning parameter filter *
1
0 Ready
1 Quick commissioning
Commissioning Manual
Commissioning Manual, (IH1), 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AF00-0BP1
107
Commissioning
2.8 First commissioning, control mode vector AC Drive in the booksize format
Procedure
8.
p0100 = 0
Description
Factory
setting
0
IEC/NEMA motor standard
0 IEC motor (SI units, e.g. kW)
Preset:
Rated motor frequency (p0310): 50 Hz
Specification of the power factor cos ϕ (p0308)
1 NEMA motor (US units, e.g. hp)
Preset:
Rated motor frequency (p0310): 60 Hz
Specification of the efficiency (p0309)
Note:
When p0100 is changed, all the rated motor parameters are reset.
9.
p030X[0] = ...
Rated motor data [MDS]
Only when p0300 < 100 (third-party motor)
Enter the rated motor data in accordance with the rating plate, e.g.
-
p0304[0] Rated motor voltage [MDS]
p0305[0] Rated motor current [MDS]
p0307[0] Rated motor output [MDS]
p0308[0] Rated motor power factor [MDS] (only when p0100 = 0)
p0309[0] Rated motor efficiency [MDS] (only when p0100 = 1)
p0310[0] Rated motor frequency [MDS]
p0311[0] Rated motor speed [MDS]
p0335[0] Motor cooling type [MDS] *
0: Natural cooling
1: Forced cooling
2 Water cooling
10.
p1900 = 2
2
Motor data identification and rotating measurement*
0 Inhibited
1 Motor data identification for rotating motor
2 Motor data identification for a stationary motor
Message A07991 is displayed, motor data identification was activated.
Danger
During motor data identification, the drive may cause the motor to move. The EMERGENCY OFF functions
must be fully operational during commissioning. To protect the machines and personnel, the relevant safety
regulations must be observed.
Operation is configured:
11.
p0010 = 0
Drive, commissioning parameter filter *
1
0 Ready
1 Quick commissioning
RDY is lit red, fault F07085 signals that a control parameter has been changed.
12.
p0840[0] =
r0019.0(DO 1)
BI: ON/OFF1 [CDS]
0
Sets the signal source for STW1.0 (ON/OFF1)
Interconnection with r0019.000 of the drive object Control Unit (DO 1)
Effect: Signal ON/OFF1 from the BOP
Commissioning Manual
108
Commissioning Manual, (IH1), 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AF00-0BP1
Commissioning
2.8 First commissioning, control mode vector AC Drive in the booksize format
Procedure
13.
p1035[0] =
r0019.0013
(DO 1)
Description
BI: Motor potentiometer setpoint higher [CDS]
Factory
setting
0
Sets the signal source to increase the setpoint for the motorized potentiometer
Interconnection with r0019.013 of the drive object Control Unit (DO 1)
Effect: Signal, motorized potentiometer setpoint higher from BOP
14.
15.
p1036[0] =
r0019.0014
(DO 1)
p1070[0] =
r1050 (DO 63)
BI: Motor potentiometer setpoint lower [CDS]
0
Sets the signal source to reduce the setpoint for the motorized potentiometer
Interconnection with r0019.014 of the drive object Control Unit (DO 1)
Effect: Signal, motorized potentiometer lower setpoint from BOP
CI: Main setpoint [CDS]
0
Sets the signal source for speed setpoint 1 of the speed controller.
Interconnection with r1050.000 to the separate drive object (DO 63)
Effect: Motorized potentiometer supplies the speed setpoint
16.
"FN", then press "P". The display indicates 41, press "O", the display jumps to 31.
17.
Start the motor data identification with "I". The drive switches off again after approx. 5 sec. the display goes back to
41.
18.
31 is displayed again after pressing "O", the drive is now ready. The drive is switched on by pressing "I", the motor
accelerates by pressing the "arrow up" key.
19.
Save all
parameters
Press the P key for approx. 5 sec until the display flashes.
* These parameters offer more setting options than the ones described here. For further setting options see
SINAMICS S120/S150 List Manual
[CDS] Parameter depends on command data sets (CDS). Data set 0 is preset.
[DDS] Parameter depends on drive data sets (DDS). Data set 0 is preset.
[MDS] Parameter depends on motor data sets (MDS). Data set 0 is preset.
BI binector input
BO binector output
CI connector input
CO connector output
Commissioning Manual
Commissioning Manual, (IH1), 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AF00-0BP1
109
Commissioning
2.9 First commissioning, control mode servo AC Drive in the booksize format
2.9
First commissioning, control mode servo AC Drive in the booksize
format
2.9.1
Initial commissioning using servo (booksize) as an example_lead text
The example provided in this section explains all the configuration and parameter settings,
as well as the tests that are required for initial commissioning. Commissioning is carried out
using the STARTER commissioning tool.
Requirements for commissioning
1. The commissioning requirements have been met according to Section 1.1.
2. The check list - Table 1-1 or 1-2 from the Chapter Preparing for commissioning - has
been filled out and the points complied with.
2.9.2
Task
1. A drive unit should be commissioned (operating mode servo, closed-loop speed control)
with the following components:
Table 2- 16
Component overview
Designation
Component
Order number
Control Unit
Control Unit 310-2DP
6SL3040-1LA00-0AA0
Operator Panel
Basic Operator Panel 20
(BOP20)
6SL3055-0AA00-4BAx
Power Module
Power Module 340
6SL3210-xxxx-xxxx
Motor
Synchronous motor with DRIVE- 1FK7061–7AF7x–xAxx
CLiQ interface
Motor encoder via DRIVE-CLiQ
Incremental encoder sin/cos
C/D
1 Vpp 2048 p/r
Closed-loop control
Infeed and drive
1FK7xxx–xxxxx–xAxx
1. Commissioning is performed using the BOP20.
2. The Basic Operator Panel (BOP) should be parameterized so that the ON/OFF signal
and the speed setpoints are entered using the function keys.
Commissioning Manual
110
Commissioning Manual, (IH1), 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AF00-0BP1
Commissioning
2.9 First commissioning, control mode servo AC Drive in the booksize format
2.9.3
Component wiring (example)
The following diagram shows a possible component configuration and wiring option.
/
/
/
'5,9(&/L4
;
&RQWURO
8QLW
'3
;
3RZHU0RGXOH
/LQHUHDFWRU
/LQHILOWHU
0RWRUFDEOH
Figure 2-25
Component wiring with integrated Sensor Module (example)
For more information on wiring and connecting the encoder system, see the Equipment
Manual.
Commissioning Manual
Commissioning Manual, (IH1), 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AF00-0BP1
111
Commissioning
2.9 First commissioning, control mode servo AC Drive in the booksize format
2.9.4
Quick commissioning using the BOP (example)
Table 2- 17
Quick commissioning of a servo drive with a DRIVE-CLiQ interface
Procedure
Description
Factory
setting
Note:
Before commissioning for the first time, in the drive mode DO = 1, the drive is restored to the factory setting.
1.
p0009 = 30
Device commissioning parameter filter
1
0 Ready
1 Device configuration
30 Parameter reset
2.
p0976 = 1
Reset and load all parameters
0
0 Not active
1 Start restoring all parameters to their factory settings
Note:
As soon as the RDY-LED is green again, the factory setting has been established and commissioning can start.
3.
p0003 = 3
Access levels
1
1 Standard
2 Extended
3 Expert
4.
p0009 = 1
Device commissioning parameter filter *
1
0 Ready
1 Device configuration
30 Parameter reset
5.
p0097 = 1
Select drive object type *
0
0 No selection
1 Drive object type SERVO
2 Drive object type VECTOR
6.
p0009 = 0
Device commissioning parameter filter *
1
0 Ready
1 Device configuration
30 Parameter reset
Note:
For the firmware to be activated, a POWER ON must be carried out for the components.
The extended setpoint channel must be opened for motorized potentiometer simulation with p0108[1] = H0104
7.
p0009 = 2
Device commissioning parameter filter *
0
Ready
1
Device configuration
2
Defining the drive type / drive options
30
8.
p0108[1] =
H0104
1
Parameter reset
Drive object, function module *
H0000
Bit 2 Closed-loop speed/torque control
Bit 8 Extended setpoint channel
Commissioning Manual
112
Commissioning Manual, (IH1), 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AF00-0BP1
Commissioning
2.9 First commissioning, control mode servo AC Drive in the booksize format
Procedure
9.
p0009 = 0
Description
Device commissioning parameter filter *
Factory
setting
1
0 Ready
1 Device configuration
30 Parameter reset
Note:
Wait until the RDY-LED changes from orange to green. To save the setting in the ROM, press about 5 seconds on the "P"
key until the BOP display flashes, then wait until flashing has stopped. The drive is now prepared.
10.
DO = 2
Select drive object (DO) 2 ( = SERVO)
1
1 Expert list of the CU
2 Expert list of the servo drive
To select a drive object (DO), simultaneously press the Fn key and the "Arrow up"
key.
The selected drive object is displayed at the top left.
11.
p0840[0] =
r0019.0(DO 1)
BI: ON/OFF1 [CDS]
0
Sets the signal source for STW1.0 (ON/OFF1)
Interconnection with r0019.0 of the drive object Control Unit (DO 1)
Effect: Signal ON/OFF1 from the BOP
12.
p1035[0] =
r0019.0013
(DO 1)
BI: Motor potentiometer setpoint higher [CDS]
0
Sets the signal source to increase the setpoint for the motorized potentiometer
Interconnection with r0019.13 of the drive object Control Unit (DO 1)
Effect: Signal, motorized potentiometer setpoint higher from BOP
13.
p1036[0] =
r0019.0014
(DO 1)
BI: Motor potentiometer setpoint lower [CDS]
0
Sets the signal source to reduce the setpoint for the motorized potentiometer
Interconnection with r0019.14 of the drive object Control Unit (DO 1)
Effect: Signal, motorized potentiometer lower setpoint from BOP
14.
p1037 = 6.000
Max. speed, setpoint potentiometer
0.000
15.
p1070[0] =
r1050 (DO 63)
CI: Main setpoint [CDS]
1024
Sets the signal source for speed setpoint 1 of the speed controller.
Interconnecting to r1050 on its own drive object (DO 63)
Effect: Motorized potentiometer supplies the speed setpoint
16.
p0006 = 0
BOP operating display mode*
4
0 Operation -> r0021, otherwise r0020 <-> r0021
1 Operation -> r0021, otherwise r0020
2 Operation -> p0005, otherwise p0005 <-> r0020
3 Operation -> r0002, otherwise r0002 <-> r0020
4 p0005
"FN", then press "P", the display in DO = 2 displays 31.
Commissioning Manual
Commissioning Manual, (IH1), 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AF00-0BP1
113
Commissioning
2.10 Commissioning of power units connected in parallel
Procedure
17.
Save all
parameters
Description
Factory
setting
Press the "P" key for approx. 5 sec, 41 is displayed. After pressing the "O" key, the display
jumps to 31 - and the drive is now ready. 10 is displayed in DO = 1.
* These parameters offer more setting options than the ones described here. For further setting options see
SINAMICS S120/S150 List Manual
[CDS] Parameter depends on command data sets (CDS). Data set 0 is preset.
[DDS] Parameter depends on drive data sets (DDS). Data set 0 is preset.
BI binector input
BO binector output
CI connector input
CO connector output
2.10
Commissioning of power units connected in parallel
During commissioning, power units connected in parallel are treated like a power unit on the
line or motor side. With parallel connection, the parameter display for the actual values
changes only slightly. Suitable "total values" are derived from the individual values of the
power units.
For parallel connection only
● chassis type infeeds
● chassis type Motor Modules in vector control mode
may be used.
During first commissioning of power units the parallel connection is activated using the
wizard in STARTER. You can also select parallel connection as an option (see following
diagrams) when choosing the power unit (infeed and/or Motor Module).
Commissioning Manual
114
Commissioning Manual, (IH1), 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AF00-0BP1
Commissioning
2.10 Commissioning of power units connected in parallel
Parallel connection of infeeds in STARTER
Figure 2-26
Example of parallel connection of 3 Active Line Modules (chassis type)
You need to specify the number of infeeds to be connected in parallel in the appropriate field
(maximum 8 infeeds).
You can also choose possible Master/Slave function for the Active Line Modules using an
option on this screen (see SINAMICS S120 Function Manual, chapter "Master/slave function
for infeeds").
The line filter is offered as an option, depending on the infeed. An Active Interface Module
(AIM) with integrated line filter is required to operate an "Active Line Module" (ALM). We
recommend external line filters to operate the "Basic Line Module" (BLM) and "Smart Line
Module" (SLM) infeeds.
Commissioning Manual
Commissioning Manual, (IH1), 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AF00-0BP1
115
Commissioning
2.10 Commissioning of power units connected in parallel
Parallel connection of Motor Modules in STARTER
Figure 2-27
Example of parallel connection of 3 Motor Modules (chassis type, vector control)
You need to specify the number of Motor Modules to be connected in parallel in the
appropriate field (maximum 8 Motor Modules).
NOTICE
For parallel connection, SIEMENS only enables the operation of a maximum of 8 power
units connected in parallel (for a maximum of 4 infeeds and a maximum of 4 Motor
Modules).
Commissioning Manual
116
Commissioning Manual, (IH1), 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AF00-0BP1
Commissioning
2.10 Commissioning of power units connected in parallel
Configuration of parallel connections using parameters
From the point of view of a higher-level PLC, the parallel connection of infeeds behaves like
the activation of a single infeed, with the running total outputs of the individual infeeds.
A connection via PROFIdrive telegrams permits the power units to be individually activated
and their status queried using parameter services from a higher-level controller. Infeeds may
also be activated using the appropriate control and status words. These are documented in
the chapter "Communication according to PROFIdrive" in the SINAMICS S120 Drive
Functions Function Manual.
Power units should only be activated and deactivated if an error occurs, that is when a power
unit fails and must be exchanged. This approach is unsuitable for variable power control, as
the drive line-up control parameters need to be recalculated after every firmware change, for
instance when the drive line-up is commissioned. Optimal, highly dynamic control behavior
of the drive line-up can only be ensured by recalculation.
The power units can be monitored and parameterized individually:
via the individual parameters p0125..p0128, p0895, r7000, p7001ff:
● Parameter p0125[0...n] "activate/deactivate power unit components" permits targeted
activation or deactivation of a power unit in the topology (choice via the topology
number).
● With p0895[0...n] BI: power unit components, a power unit is activated or deactivated
using an interconnected digital input (BI).
● The number of currently active power units connected in parallel can be displayed by
parameter r7000.
● After an error or exchange of units, parameter p7001[0...n] (Par_circuit enable power
units) allows targeted activation or deactivation of connected power units.
You can still cancel alarms in this state (due to overtemperatures for example). Individual
power units cannot be disabled for motors with separate winding systems (p7003 = 1).
p7001 is reset automatically if a power unit is deactivated with p0125 or p0895.
● You can use parameter r7002[0..n] to query whether the pulse in a power unit is inhibited
or enabled.
● Parameters r7050[0..n], r7051[0..n] and r7052[0..n] can be used to display the circuit
currents for U, V, W on the power units.
● Overload states and various temperature states in the power units can be displayed with
parameters from r7200[0..n] onwards.
Parallel connection is indicated with a "P" in front of the value shown on the parameter value
display.
You can find out more about other parameters relevant for the operation and
parameterization of power units in the references: SINAMICS S120/S150 List Manual from
parameter r7002ff or p0125 onwards.
Commissioning Manual
Commissioning Manual, (IH1), 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AF00-0BP1
117
Commissioning
2.10 Commissioning of power units connected in parallel
Parallel connection with one or two Control Units
If an infeed is deactivated, the pre-charging must be able to charge the rest of the infeeds in
the DC link. E.g. The pre-charging time is doubled when only one infeed is available instead
of previously two infeeds in parallel. If possible, the infeeds should be dimensioned such that
one infeed, or with redundant interconnection (2 Control Units), one subsystem is able to
pre-charge the whole DC link.
The connected capacitance should not be too large. However, pre-charging double an
infeed's rated capacitance (one of two infeeds previously out of operation) will work with no
problems.
Pre-charging contactor monitoring
To monitor pre-charging contactors (for infeed failure), auxiliary terminal blocks must be
retrospectively connected to the pre-charging contactors.
The following diagram shows the basic concept of interconnection:
3UHFKDUJLQJ
,QIHHG,QIHHG,QIHHG
2SHQLQJGHOD\V
! 7__
H[WIDXOW
9
DGGLWLRQDOWHUPLQDOEORFNVRQSUHFKDUJLQJFRQWDFWRUV
Figure 2-28
Pre-charging monitoring
The contactor states are monitored using the logic blocks "free blocks" in the SINAMICS
drive. If one of the contactors does not pick up, an external fault message is generated.
Commissioning Manual
118
Commissioning Manual, (IH1), 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AF00-0BP1
Commissioning
2.11 Learn devices
Operating state of power units connected in parallel
Fault messages and alarms from A05000ff or F05000ff onwards indicate errors in a power
unit.
Power unit faults are stored in the fault buffer in the appropriate Control Unit and can be read
as a fault value using parameter r0949 (interpreted decimally). This fault value corresponds
to the drive object number in the drive line-up topology. The number of the fault occurring is
stored in parameter r0945.
The power unit's operating state (infeed or Motor Module) is displayed at both front LEDs on
the corresponding Control Interface Module (CIM).
You can identify the power unit for a particular drive using parameter p0124[0...n] "Power
unit detection via LED". During p0124 = 1, the LED READY on the power unit concerned
flashes green/orange or red/orange at 2 Hz. For parallel connections the parameter index is
assigned to one power unit in each case.
Configuration of power units connected in parallel
Information on the hardware configuration and wiring the power units is provided in the
SINAMICS S120 Equipment Manual Chassis Power Units.
You can find information on configuration in "SINAMICS Configuration Manual G130, G150,
S120 Chassis, S120 Cabinet Modules, S150". The installation of power units within a control
cabinet with Line Connection Modules is also described there.
2.11
Learn devices
Description
Using a software update, the "learning devices" function amends an existing STARTER
(from version V4.2) with information about later drive firmware versions.
The update is implemented with a SINAMICS Support Package (SSP) from STARTER
version 4.2. In STARTER, equipment descriptions are added to without changing the code or
newly installing STARTER, and without the drive being physically available.
A SINAMICS Support Package must be installed if SINAMICS STARTER versions that are
not covered by STARTER version 4.2 need to be supported. You can download SINAMICS
Support Packages on the Internet from the eSupport and Product Support pages.
The existence of new SSPs in Product Support will be announced when a new SINAMICS
version is released for delivery.
Commissioning Manual
Commissioning Manual, (IH1), 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AF00-0BP1
119
Commissioning
2.12 Selection and configuration of encoders
SSP (SINAMICS Support Package)
An SSP contains only description files of the devices and drive objects. By installing an SSP,
new drive objects and devices can be added to an existing STARTER installation, without
changing its program code.
After installation, all the functions of the new SINAMICS version can be configured with the
expert list. All screens and wizards are also available for all the functions compatible with the
previous version.
SSP content:
● New drive objects
● New device versions
● New and changed parameters in the expert list
● New and changed faults, alarms and messages
● New and changed sequence parameterizations
● Expansions of the component catalog (new motors, encoders, DRIVE-CLiQ components)
● Expansion of the configuration catalog (SD)
● Changed online help files (parameter help, function diagrams)
Installation
All SSPs released for a STARTER version may be installed in any order.
The installed SINAMICS Support Packages are displayed in the Info dialog box of
STARTER.
If a new STARTER version has been created and delivered, this STARTER contains all
SSPs released up until the present time, or is compatible with them.
Compatible SSPs can also be installed a multiple number of times if repairs are necessary,
without functional changes.
STARTER should not be running during SSP installation. The installation program should be
started and run through. Only after the installation has been finished and STARTER has
been called up again, can you now configure the newly installed SINAMICS versions offline
and operate them online (via "Accessible nodes" for example).
2.12
Selection and configuration of encoders
Encoder selection
For SINAMICS drives there are three possibilities of selecting the encoder using STARTER:
1. Evaluating the motor and encoder data via a DRIVE-CLiQ interface.
Commissioning Manual
120
Commissioning Manual, (IH1), 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AF00-0BP1
Commissioning
2.12 Selection and configuration of encoders
The encoder is automatically identified by setting the parameter p0400 = 10000 or 10100,
i.e. all of the motor and encoder data required for the configuration are read out of the
encoder. For p0400 = 10100, the identification time is not limited.
2. Select a standard encoder from a list (also possible via the motor order number for
encoder 1/motor encoder). Every encoder type on the list has a code number (see
SINAMICS S120/S150 List Manual), that can also be assigned using parameter p0400
(encoder type selection).
3. Manually entering user-defined encoder data. The user himself can configure the encoder
using the encoder-specific STARTER screens.
The encoders can also be configured on their own using parameters (parameter p0400, ff).
Table 2- 18
Assigning encoder type, encoder code and evaluation modules for standard encoders
Encoder type
Encoder code
Encoder evaluation procedure
Evaluation module
Resolver
Incremental
rotary
1001
1002
1003
1004
Resolver 1-speed
Resolver 2-speed
Resolver 3-speed
Resolver 4-speed
SMC10, SMI10
Encoder with
sin/cos 1Vpp
Incremental
encoder
rotary
2001
2002
2003
2005
2010
2048, 1 Vpp, A/B C/D R
2048, 1 Vpp, A/B R
256, 1 Vpp, A/B R
512, 1 Vpp, A/B R
18000, 1 Vpp, A/B R distance-coded
SMC20, SMI20,
SME20, SME120
EnDat
encoder
Absolute value
rotary
2051
2052
2053
2054
2055
2048, 1 Vpp, A/B, EnDat, multiturn 4096
32, 1 Vpp, A/B, EnDat, multiturn 4096
512, 1 Vpp, A/B, EnDat, multiturn 4096
16, 1 Vpp, A/B, EnDat, multiturn 4096
2048, 1 Vpp, A/B, EnDat, singleturn
SMC20, SMI20,
SME25
SSI encoder
with
sin/cos 1Vpp
Absolute value
rotary
2081
2082
2083
2084
2048, 1 Vpp, A/B, SSI, singleturn
2048, 1 Vpp, A/B, SSI, multiturn 4096
2048, 1 Vpp, A/B, SSI, singleturn, error bit
2048, 1 Vpp, A/B, SSI, multiturn 4096, error
bit
SMC20, SMI20,
SME25, SME125
Linear
encoder
Incremental
linear
2110
2111
2112
2151
4000 nm, 1 Vpp, A/B R distance-coded
20000 nm, 1 Vpp, A/B R distance-coded
40000 nm, 1 Vpp, A/B R distance-coded
16000 nm, 1 Vpp, A/B, EnDat, resolution
100 nm
SMC20, SMI20,
SME20
Absolute value
linear
2151
16000 nm, 1 Vpp, A/B, EnDat,
resolution 100 nm
SMC20, SMI20,
SME25
Incremental
right angle
rotary
3001
3002
3003
3005
3006
3007
3008
3009
3011
3020
1024 HTL A/B R
1024 TTL A/B R
2048 HTL A/B R
1024 HTL A/B
1024 TTL A/B
2048 HTL A/B
2048 TTL A/B
1024 HTL A/B unipolar
2048 HTL A/B unipolar
2048 TTL A/B R, with Sense
SMC30
HTL/TTL
encoders
Commissioning Manual
Commissioning Manual, (IH1), 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AF00-0BP1
121
Commissioning
2.12 Selection and configuration of encoders
Encoder type
Encoder code
Encoder evaluation procedure
Evaluation module
Absolute value
rotary
3081
3082
SSI, singleturn, 24 V
SSI, multiturn 4096, 24 V
Not for motor control,
only as a direct measurement system
SMC20, SMI20,
SME25, SME125
SSI encoder Absolute value
absolute HTL rotary
3090
4096, HTL, A/B, SSI, singleturn
SMC30
Linear
encoder
Incremental
linear
3109
2000 nm, TTL, A/B R distance-coded
SMC20, SMI20,
SME20
DRIVE-CLiQ
encoder
Absolute rotary
value
202
242
204
244
Abs.,singleturn 20 bit
abs.,singleturn 24 Bit
abs.,multiturn 12 bit, singleturn 20 bit)
abs.,multiturn 12 bit, singleturn 24 bit)
-
SIMAG H2
Incremental
encoder
rotary
2002
2003
2004
2005
2006
2007
2008
2048, 1 Vpp, A/B R
256, 1 Vpp, A/B R
400, 1 Vpp, A/B R
512, 1 Vpp, A/B R
192, 1 Vpp, A/B R
480, 1 Vpp, A/B R
800, 1 Vpp, A/B R
SMC20, SMI20,
SME20
SSI encoder
absolute
Encoder configuration
You can configure the encoders using a screen in STARTER.
1. If you mark the appropriate checkbox option, encoders with a DRIVE-CLiQ interface are
automatically identified on the encoder configuration screen.
Commissioning Manual
122
Commissioning Manual, (IH1), 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AF00-0BP1
Commissioning
2.12 Selection and configuration of encoders
Figure 2-29
Identifying DRIVE-CLiQ encoders
Commissioning Manual
Commissioning Manual, (IH1), 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AF00-0BP1
123
Commissioning
2.12 Selection and configuration of encoders
2. You can select standard encoders from a list. The encoder 1 / motor encoder can also be
selected and configured at the same time using the motor order number.
Figure 2-30
Standard encoder option
When configuring the drive you can select the standard encoders offered by Siemens from a
list under "encoder". When the encoder type is chosen, all necessary parameterizations are
simultaneously and automatically transferred into the encoder configuration. The standard
encoder type and the corresponding evaluation modules are shown in the above table.
1. The user can also configure the connected encoders specifically, using the STARTER
screens.
Commissioning Manual
124
Commissioning Manual, (IH1), 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AF00-0BP1
Commissioning
2.12 Selection and configuration of encoders
Figure 2-31
User-defined encoder option
For this select the option "Enter data" and press the "Encoder data" button.
Commissioning Manual
Commissioning Manual, (IH1), 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AF00-0BP1
125
Commissioning
2.12 Selection and configuration of encoders
The following screen appears:
Figure 2-32
Rotary encoder types
You can choose between "rotary" and "linear" encoders on this screen.
For rotary encoders, the following encoder types can be configured:
● Resolver
● Incremental encoder with sin/cos signal
● Absolute encoder with EnDat protocol
● Incremental encoder with HTL/TTL signal
● Absolute encoder with SSI protocol
● Absolute encoder with SSI protocol and HTL/TTL signal
● Absolute encoder with SSI protocol and sin/cos signal
Commissioning Manual
126
Commissioning Manual, (IH1), 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AF00-0BP1
Commissioning
2.12 Selection and configuration of encoders
The linear encoder screen offers the following encoder types:
Figure 2-33
Linear encoder types
For linear encoders, you can configure the following encoder types:
● Absolute encoder with EnDat protocol
● Incremental encoder with sin/cos signal
● Incremental encoder with HTL/TTL signal
● Absolute encoder with SSI protocol
● Absolute encoder with SSI protocol and HTL/TTL signal
● Absolute encoder with SSI protocol and sin/cos signal
The encoder-specific screens for both rotary and linear encoder types are self-explanatory
and so will not be presented in more detail here.
The following describes commissioning and replacing an encoder using the DRIVE-CLiQ
encoder as an example.
Commissioning Manual
Commissioning Manual, (IH1), 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AF00-0BP1
127
Commissioning
2.12 Selection and configuration of encoders
Encoders with a DRIVE-CLiQ interface
Encoder evaluation units with DRIVE-CLiQ interface are available in different versions, e.g.
● as Sensor Module Cabinet-Mounted (SMCx) for rail mounting,
● as Sensor Module External (SMEx) to be incorporated in the feeder cable,
● as Sensor Module Integrated (SMI), mounted on the motor, or
● as DRIVE-CLiQ Module Integrated (DQI), integrated in the motor.
A temperature sensor at the DRIVE-CLiQ encoder to detect the motor temperature is
connected in the factory.
Support with STARTER version
STARTER supports an encoder with DRIVE-CLiQ interface. Additional order numbers
(MLFBs) are available for the corresponding DRIVE-CLiQ motors in the encoder overview.
The motor order number is used for an SMI or DQI motor.
When configuring a motor with DRIVE-CLiQ interface, a distinction is not made between SMI
motors and DQI motors.
Note
Restrictions for SMI/DQI motors
Only absolute encoders are used in motors with integrated DRIVE-CLiQ encoders.
If you replace a motor with encoder and external DRIVE-CLiQ interface by an SMI motor or
DQI motor, then you must appropriately reparameterize the SMI/DQI motor.
The functional behavior differs for the following encoder changes:
● If the encoders differ due to the measurement principle and the resolution.
● If the encoders are used in applications where the evaluation requires a zero mark (for
example for referencing purposes). The encoder with integrated DRIVE-CLiQ interface
does not supply a separate zero mark, as it involves an absolute encoder. So in these
applications (and/or in the superimposed controls) the changed behavior must be
selected.
● If the encoder is to be used on an axis with SINAMICS Safety Integrated Extended
Functions or SINUMERIK Safety Integrated because a lower position accuracy (SOS
Safe Operating Stop) and a lower maximum velocity (SLS Safely Limited Speed) is
obtained as a result of the lower resolution of the redundant position value (POS2).
A new commissioning test and, if necessary, new configuration must be carried out for
activated SINAMICS Safety Integrated Extended Functions or SINUMERIK Safety
Integrated.
Commissioning Manual
128
Commissioning Manual, (IH1), 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AF00-0BP1
Commissioning
2.12 Selection and configuration of encoders
Commissioning encoders with a DRIVE-CLiQ interface
For DRIVE-CLiQ encoders, the properties of a rotary absolute encoder are identified with the
following parameters of the Control Unit:
● p0404[0..n] Encoder configuration active
● p0408[0..n] Rotary encoder pulse number
● p0421[0..n] Absolute encoder rotary multiturn resolution
● p0423[0..n] Absolute encoder rotary singleturn resolution
This data is pre-assigned according to the preset codes in p0400 (encoder type selection)
from the encoder lists. Parameters p0404, p0408, p0421 and p0423 are checked by the
Control Unit when booting.
Alternatively the data can be read out from the encoder with the setting p0400 = 10000 or
p0400 = 10100 (identify encoder). If the encoder data that is read out corresponds to a
known encoder type, then the Control Unit software enters this code into p0400. Otherwise
the general code p0400 = 10050 (encoder with EnDat interface identified) will be entered.
A DRIVE-CLiQ encoder is identified by the parameter p0404.10 = 1.
For DRIVE-CLiQ encoders, encoder codes are defined respectively for parameter p0400
(see SINAMICS S120/S150 List Manual and above table).
If the Control Unit software identifies a DRIVE-CLiQ encoder type for which no code is
stored, during identification it enters the code p0400 = 10051 (DRIVE-CLiQ encoder
identified).
The data is also automatically identified if a DRIVE-CLiQ encoder is found during automatic
commissioning. During identification, the Control Unit reads out the values for p0404, p0421
and p0423 from the DRIVE-CLiQ encoder. The Control Unit uses this data to determine the
contents of p0400. The newly defined codes are not stored in the DRIVE-CLiQ encoder.
Replacing a SINAMICS Sensor Module Integrated
Contact your local Siemens office regarding repair if a defect occurs in a SINAMICS Sensor
Module Integrated (SMI) or in a DRIVE-CLiQ Sensor Integrated (DQI).
Commissioning Manual
Commissioning Manual, (IH1), 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AF00-0BP1
129
Commissioning
2.13 Commissioning linear motors (servo)
2.13
Commissioning linear motors (servo)
2.13.1
General information on commissioning linear motors
Before commissioning motors, the following questions must be answered:
1. Are all of the preconditions for commissioning fulfilled?
2. Were the points in the commissioning checklist checked, see Chapter "Checklists for
commissioning SINAMICS S"?
Detailed information on linear motors, encoders and power connection, configuring and
mounting are provided in:
Configuration Manual for Linear Motors 1FN3 or 1FN6
Terminology for rotary and linear drives
Table 2- 19
Terminology
Terminology for rotary drives
Terminology for linear drives
Speed
Velocity
Torque
Force
Stator
Primary section
Rotor
Secondary section
Rotor
Secondary section
Direction of rotation
Direction
Pulse number
Grid spacing
Rotate
Run
Checks in the no-current state
The following checks can be made:
1. Linear motor
– What linear motor is used?
1FN _ _ _ _ – _ _ _ _ _ – _ _ _ _
– Is the motor already mounted and ready to be powered up?
– If a cooling circuit is being used, is it functional?
Commissioning Manual
130
Commissioning Manual, (IH1), 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AF00-0BP1
Commissioning
2.13 Commissioning linear motors (servo)
2. Mechanical system
– Is the axis easy to move over the complete traversing range?
– Does the air gap between the primary and secondary section and the mounting
dimensions correspond to the motor manufacturer's data?
– Hanging (suspended) axis:
If weight equalizing is used for the axis is this functioning?
– Brake:
If a brake is being used, is it correctly controlled (see the SINAMICS S120 Function
Manual)?
– Traversing range limiting:
Are the mechanical end stops available and tightly bolted to both ends of the
traversing path?
– Are the moving feeder cables correctly routed in a cable drag assembly?
3. Measuring system
– Which measuring system is being used?
____________
– Absolute or incremental? abs incr
– Grid spacing _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ µm
– Zero marks (number and position)_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
– Where is the positive drive direction?
Where is the positive counting direction of the measuring system?
– Invert (p0410)? yes / no
Commissioning Manual
Commissioning Manual, (IH1), 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AF00-0BP1
131
Commissioning
2.13 Commissioning linear motors (servo)
4. Wiring
– Power unit (connect UVW, phase sequence, clockwise rotating field)
– Protective conductor connected?
– Shield connected?
– Temperature monitoring circuits:
Are the cables connected to the terminal block of the shield connecting plate?
Temperature sensor (Temp-F):
- with the temperature sensor (Temp-F) the average absolute winding temperature
can be measured.
Overtemperature switch (Temp-S):
- the overtemperature trip circuit (Temp-S) enables each individual motor phase
winding to be digitally monitored for an overtemperature condition.
DANGER
The circuits of Temp-F and Temp-S neither have "protective separation" between
each other nor to the power circuits in accordance with IEC 61800-5-1.
The temperature monitoring circuits must be connected via the Sensor Module
SME12x so that the specifications of the EN 61800-5-1 are fulfilled. These
specifications are not fulfilled when the temperature monitoring circuits are
connected via the SMC20 Sensor Module.
See also the Configuration Manual for Linear Motors 1FN3 or 1FN6.
– Temperature sensor evaluation
– Temperature monitoring with SME12x, (description of the temperature monitoring
circuits see - connection to the SME12x in the Configuration Manual 1FN3 or 1FN6 in
chapter "Thermal motor protection", description for connection to the SME12x, see
chapter "Connection of the temperature monitoring circuits)
– Encoder system connection
Is the encoder system connected correctly to SINAMICS?
Commissioning Manual
132
Commissioning Manual, (IH1), 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AF00-0BP1
Commissioning
2.13 Commissioning linear motors (servo)
2.13.2
Commissioning: Linear motor with one primary section
Commissioning with STARTER
DANGER
Linear drives can achieve significantly higher rates of acceleration and velocities than
conventional drives.
The traversing range must always be kept clear in order to avoid any potential danger for
man or machine.
Commissioning the motor with STARTER
1. Selecting the motor type
Commissioning Manual
Commissioning Manual, (IH1), 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AF00-0BP1
133
Commissioning
2.13 Commissioning linear motors (servo)
You can select a standard motor from the list of motors. You can enter the motor data for
third-party motors manually. The number of parallel primary sections (p0306) must be
entered.
Figure 2-34
STARTER screen, linear motor selection 1FN3
2. Enter motor data
The following motor data must be entered for third-party motors:
Table 2- 20
Parameter
Motor data
Description
Comment
p0305
Rated motor current
-
p0311
Motor rated velocity
-
p0315
Motor pole pair width
-
p0316
Motor force constant
-
p0322
Motor velocity, maximum
-
p0323
Maximum motor current
-
p0338
Motor limit current
-
Commissioning Manual
134
Commissioning Manual, (IH1), 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AF00-0BP1
Commissioning
2.13 Commissioning linear motors (servo)
Parameter
Description
Comment
p0341
Motor weight
-
p0350
Motor stator resistance, cold
-
p0356
Motor stator leakage inductance
-
Table 2- 21
Optionally, further motor data (linear synchronous motor) can be entered for third-party
motors:
Parameter
Description
Comment
p0312
Rated motor force
-
p0317
Motor voltage constant
-
p0318
Motor stall current
-
p0319
Motor stall force
-
p0320
Rated motor magnetizing current
-
p0326
Stall torque correction factor
-
p0329
Pole position identification current
-
p0348
Speed at start of field weakening
-
p0353
Motor series inductance
-
p0391
Current controller adaptation, lower application
point
-
p0392
Current controller adaptation, upper application
point
-
p0393
Current controller adaptation, P gain, scaling upper
Commissioning Manual
Commissioning Manual, (IH1), 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AF00-0BP1
135
Commissioning
2.13 Commissioning linear motors (servo)
3. User-defined encoder data
With linear motors, the encoder is configured in the "User-defined encoder data" screen.
Figure 2-35
Encoder data screen in STARTER
WARNING
When linear motors are configured for the first time, the commutation angle offset (p0431)
must be adjusted. For more information about the commutation angle offset and pole
position identification (servo), see the Function Manual S120, servo control chapter.
Commissioning Manual
136
Commissioning Manual, (IH1), 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AF00-0BP1
Commissioning
2.13 Commissioning linear motors (servo)
2.13.3
Commissioning: Linear motor with several identical primary sections
General information
If you are sure that the EMF of more than one motor has the same relative phase position to
another, the connecting cables can be connected in parallel and operated from one Motor
Module.
Linear motors connected in parallel are commissioned based on the commissioning of a
single linear motor. To activate the parallel connection of linear motors, in the window
"Configuration - SINAMICS_S120_CU320 - 2nd motor" set a check mark for "Parallel motor
connection".
The number of primary sections connected in parallel is entered in the "Motor" screen form
(p0306) when the drive is configured in STARTER.
The linear motors are connected individually in sequence to the drive, and are commissioned
as a single motor (1FNx ...). The angular commutation offset is automatically determined and
noted for each motor. Finally, the measured angular commutation offset of the motors are
compared with each other.
If the difference between the angular commutation offset is less than 5 degrees (electrical),
all the motors can be connected to the drive in parallel and commissioned as a parallel
configuration of n linear motors (e.g. 2 • 1FN3xxx).
Permitted parallel connection
Only linear motors that fulfill the following preconditions may be connected in parallel:
● Identical primary section size
● Identical winding type
● Identical air gap
Note
If linear motors in an axis are connected in parallel, the position of the primary sections with
respect to one another and to the secondary sections must exhibit a specific grid, in order to
achieve a matching electrical phase position.
For more information see: Configuration Manual for Linear Motors 1FN3 or 1FN6
Commissioning Manual
Commissioning Manual, (IH1), 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AF00-0BP1
137
Commissioning
2.13 Commissioning linear motors (servo)
Temperature sensors and electrical wiring
The temperature sensors can be evaluated, for example, as follows:
● Temperature sensor
– Motor 1: Connection via SME12x and evaluation via the drive control
– Motor n: not connected
(short-circuited and connected to the PE)
● Temperature switch
– Motor 1 to n: Evaluation via the drive control
See also: Configuration Manual for Linear Motors 1FN3 or 1FN6
WARNING
When connecting-up the temperature monitoring circuits, carefully observe the
requirements regarding protective separation in accordance with EN 61800-5-1.
See also: Configuration Manual for Linear Motor 1FN3 or 1FN6
2.13.4
Thermal motor protection
Temperature monitoring circuits Temp-F and Temp-S
The motors are supplied with two temperature monitoring circuits: Temp - F and Temp - S.
Temp-F is to monitor and evaluate the temperature characteristic in the motor being used.
Temp-S is used to activate motor protection if the motor windings get too hot.
Both circuits are independent of each other. They are generally evaluated via the drive
system. For temperature monitoring, the SME12x Sensor Modules can be used for thermal
motor protection.
Temp-F (KTY 84 Sensor)
The temperature monitoring circuit Temp-F consists of a KTY 84 temperature sensor located
at the coils. Under certain circumstances – especially when the individual phases have a
different current level – this can mean that the maximum temperature of the three phase
windings is not measured. An evaluation of Temp-F for motor protection is therefore not
permissible. Temp-F is used to monitor the temperature - and if necessary to output an
alarm indicating that the drive is being switched off because Temp-S has responded.
Commissioning Manual
138
Commissioning Manual, (IH1), 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AF00-0BP1
Commissioning
2.13 Commissioning linear motors (servo)
Temp-S (PTC element)
The overtemperature shutdown circuitconsists of thermistor temperature sensors (PTC
elements). There is a PTC thermistor temperature sensor for monitoring the motor winding in
each of the three phase-windings (U, V and W). This ensures overload protection, even if the
current in the individual phases of a primary section is not the same - or if several primary
sections have different load levels. The PTC elements are connected in series.
The circuit and connection system for Temp-F and Temp-S are described in detail in the
Configuration Manual; linear motors 1FN3 or 1FN6.
The SME12x (Sensor Module External) is a device with connectors enabling the connection
of various sensors of a direct drive (WMS, Hall sensors, temperature sensors). The output of
the SME12x is connected to SINAMICS drive systems via DRIVE-CLiQ. The requirements
regarding protective separation in accordance with EN 61800-5-1 are fulfilled by the
electrical isolation between the voltage circuits for power and sensors. The SME12x
therefore fulfills the following functions:
● All signal cables can be connected close to the motor.
● Temperature sensors can be fully evaluated:
– Thermal motor protection through evaluation of Temp-S
– Display of the temperature curve via evaluation of Temp-F
There are two variants of SME12x:
● SME120 for incremental position measurement systems
● SME125 for absolute position measurement systems
You will find further information on the SME12x in the SINAMICS S120 Equipment Manual,
Control Units and Additional System Components, in the chapter Encoder System
Connection.
DANGER
The circuits of Temp-F and Temp-S neither have "protective separation" between each
other nor to the power circuits in accordance with EN 61800-5-1.
DANGER
Connect Temp-S for thermal motor protection. It is impermissible to not connect Temp-S!
You can optionally connect Temp-F to a measuring instrument for commissioning or test
purposes.
In normal operation, short-circuit the Temp-F connections and connect to PE.
Note
The Temp-F temperature sensor only evaluates the winding temperature of one phase in the
primary section. However, the phases in the synchronous motor have different loads. Higher
temperatures can occur in the phases that are not measured.
Commissioning Manual
Commissioning Manual, (IH1), 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AF00-0BP1
139
Commissioning
2.13 Commissioning linear motors (servo)
Note
Without using a suitable protective module (e.g. TM120), for safe electrical separation it is
not permissible to connect Temp-F to a Sensor Module of the SINAMICS drive system.
The drive must always be switched into a no-voltage condition. When handling and
connecting Temp-F, when the drive is switched-on, hazardous voltages can be present at
the terminals on the motor side and at the Temp-F connecting cable.
Note
If a 3RN1013-1BW10 thermistor motor protection device or a suitable protective module is
not used, then for safe electrical separation it is not permissible to connect Temp-S to a PLC
or to a Sensor Module of the SINAMICS drive system.
The drive must always be switched into a no-voltage condition. When handling and
connecting Temp-S, when the drive is switched-on, hazardous voltages can be present at
the terminals on the motor side and at the Temp-S connecting cable.
Temperature evaluation unit with safe electrical separation
Terminal Module 120 is a temperature evaluation unit with DRIVE-CLiQ interface for
installation in a control cabinet. The TM120 has 4 measuring channels with safe electrical
separation to connect KTY or PTC temperature sensors. A TM120 can also be used with
Sensor Modules for encoder evaluation (SMCxx, SMIxx and SMExx) if safe electrical
separation of the temperature sensors is necessary.
Evaluating the temperature sensors
See also: Configuration Manual for Linear Motors 1FN3 or 1FN6.
Commissioning Manual
140
Commissioning Manual, (IH1), 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AF00-0BP1
Commissioning
2.13 Commissioning linear motors (servo)
2.13.5
Measuring system
Determining the control sense
The control sense of an axis is correct if the positive direction of the drive (= clockwise
rotating field U, V, W) coincides with the positive counting direction of the measuring system.
Note
The data to determine the drive direction is only valid for Siemens motors (1FNx motors).
If the positive direction of the drive and positive counting direction of the measuring system
do not match, the actual speed value (P0410.0) must be inverted in the "Encoder
configuration - details" screen form when the drive is being commissioned.
The control sense can also be checked by first parameterizing the drive, and then manually
moving it, with the enable signals inhibited (switched out).
If the axis is moved in the positive direction, the actual speed value must also count in the
positive direction.
Determining the drive direction
The direction of the drive is positive if the primary section moves relative to the secondary
section in the opposite direction to the cable outlet direction.
3ULPDU\VHFWLRQ
&DEOHRXWOHWGLUHFWLRQ
6HFRQGDU\VHFWLRQPDJQHWV
1QRUWKSROHPDUNLQJ
6HFRQGDU\VHFWLRQPDJQHWV
1QRUWKSROHPDUNLQJ
3ULPDU\VHFWLRQ
Figure 2-36
&DEOHRXWOHWGLUHFWLRQ
Determining the positive direction of the drive
Commissioning Manual
Commissioning Manual, (IH1), 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AF00-0BP1
141
Commissioning
2.13 Commissioning linear motors (servo)
Determining the counting direction of the measuring system
The counting direction is determined depending on the measuring system.
Measuring systems from Heidenhain
Note
The counting direction of the measuring system is positive, if the distance between the
sensor head and rating plate increases.
6HQVRUKHDG
6FDOH
Figure 2-37
+
5DWLQJSODWH
Determining the counting direction for measuring systems from the Heidenhain Company
Measuring systems from Renishaw (e.g. RGH22B)
As the reference mark for the Renishaw RGH22B has a direction-dependent position, with
control cables BID and DIR, the encoder must be parameterized, so that the reference mark
is only output in one direction.
The direction (positive/negative) depends on the geometrical arrangement at the machine
and the reference point approach direction.
Table 2- 22
Signal
Overview of signals
Cable color
Circular connector
12-pin
Connected to
+5 V
0V
BID
Black
Pin 9
Reference marks in
both directions
Reference marks in
one direction
DIR
Orange
Pin 7
Positive directions
Negative direction
+5 V
Brown
Pin 12
0V
White
Pin 10
Commissioning Manual
142
Commissioning Manual, (IH1), 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AF00-0BP1
Commissioning
2.13 Commissioning linear motors (servo)
The counting direction of the measuring system is positive if the sensor head moves relative
to the gold band in the cable outlet direction.
6HQVRUKHDG
0HDVXULQJV\VWHP
Figure 2-38
*ROGEDQG
Determining the counting direction for measuring systems from Renishaw
Note
If the sensor head is mechanically connected to the primary section, the cable outlet
direction must be different. Otherwise, invert the actual value.
Commissioning Manual
Commissioning Manual, (IH1), 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AF00-0BP1
143
Commissioning
2.13 Commissioning linear motors (servo)
2.13.6
Checking the linear motor by taking measurements
Why make measurements?
If the linear motor was commissioned according to the relevant instructions, and unexplained
fault messages still occur, then all of the EMF signals must be checked using an
oscilloscope.
Checking the phase sequence U-V-W
For primary sections connected in parallel, the EMF_U from motor 1 must be in phase with
the EMF_U from motor 2. The same is true for EMF_V and EMF_W.
It is absolutely necessary that this is checked by making the appropriate measurements.
Taking the necessary measurements
● Disconnect the drive line-up from the power supply.
● Notice: Wait until the DC link has been discharged!
● Disconnect the power cables from the drive.
Disconnect any primary components connected in parallel.
● Form an artificial neutral point using 1 kOhm resistors.
/LQHDU
PRWRU
8
9
:
N˖
N˖
(0)B:
Figure 2-39
N˖
(0)B9
(0)B8
Configuration for taking the measurements
Commissioning Manual
144
Commissioning Manual, (IH1), 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AF00-0BP1
Commissioning
2.13 Commissioning linear motors (servo)
For a positive traversing direction, the phase sequence must be U-V-W. The direction of the
drive is positive if the primary section moves relative to the secondary section in the opposite
direction to the cable outlet direction.
3ULPDU\VHFWLRQ
&DEOHRXWOHWGLUHFWLRQ
6HFRQGDU\VHFWLRQPDJQHWV
1QRUWKSROHPDUNLQJ
6HFRQGDU\VHFWLRQPDJQHWV
1QRUWKSROHPDUNLQJ
&DEOHRXWOHWGLUHFWLRQ
3ULPDU\VHFWLRQ
Figure 2-40
The positive direction of the drive (clockwise rotating field)
Determining the commutation angle using an oscilloscope
Once the oscilloscope has been connected, the drive must first pass the zero mark so that
fine synchronization can be carried out.
The angular, commutation offset can be determined by measuring the EMF and normalized
electrical pole position via an analog output.
&K
&K
&K
&K
Figure 2-41
Oscillogram
Definition of channels (Ch1 ... Ch4):
● Ch1 EMF phase U to neutral point
● Ch2: EMF phase V to neutral point
● Ch3: EMF phase W to neutral point
● Ch4: Normalized electrical angular pole position via analog output
Commissioning Manual
Commissioning Manual, (IH1), 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AF00-0BP1
145
Commissioning
2.14 Notes on commissioning SSI encoders
Figure 2-42
Setting of the measuring socket T0 on CU320
When the drive is synchronized, the difference between the EMF/phase U and the electrical
rotor position is a maximum of 10°.
If the difference is greater, the commutation angle offset must be adjusted.
2.14
Notes on commissioning SSI encoders
Using error bits
The number and position of error bits may vary for SSI encoders. In the event of faults, error
codes may even sometimes be transferred within the position information.
It is therefore essential that you assess all the error bits present (see below for
parameterization and limitations) as otherwise an error code may be interpreted as position
information if faults are present.
Hardware requirements
● SMC20 Sensor Module Cabinet-Mounted
● SME25 Sensor Module External
● SMC30 Sensor Module Cabinet-Mounted
● CU320-2 Control Unit
Commissioning Manual
146
Commissioning Manual, (IH1), 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AF00-0BP1
Commissioning
2.14 Notes on commissioning SSI encoders
Types of encoder that can be connected
Table 2- 23
Overview of encoder types that can be connected depending on the SIEMENS evaluation module
Encoder
evaluation
through module
Incremental tracks
Absolute position
Power supply for
encoder
SSI baud rate
Remarks
SMC20
sin/cos, 1 Vpp
SSI not cyclic 1)
5V
100 kBaud
-
SME25
sin/cos, 1 Vpp
SSI not cyclic
5V
100 kBaud
SME25 is only
suited to direct
measuring
systems
SMC30
Square or
SSI not cyclic 1), 3)
5 V or 24 V
SSI, cyclic 2)
100250 kBaud
-
no incremental
tracks
1)
1) "not cyclic" means that the absolute position is only read when initializing the Sensor Module, after which the position is
only calculated by the incremental tracks.
"cyclic" means that the absolute position is read permanently (usually in the PROFIBUS or position controller cycle) and
the position (X_IST1) formed from this.
2)
3)
the SSI protocol is cyclically read-out for the plausibility checks
Note
Only encoders that support a transfer rate of 100 kHz and that have a high level in idle state
may be used.
The monoflop time should be parameterized such that it is greater than or equal to the
specified monoflop time of the encoder. This must lie in the range between 15 – 30 µs.
The level during the monoflop time must be low.
Ramp-up time of the encoder
In order to ensure that correct sensor data is received, the encoder evaluation module
checks, after its own ramp-up, whether the connected encoder has also ramped up.
To do this, the SINAMICS converter system proceeds as follows:
● After the power supply is switched on at the encoder, no signals are evaluated for a
waiting period of 800 ms.
● After the waiting period has expired, clock signals are applied to the clock cable and the
response of the data line observed. As long as the encoder has not ramped up, the
encoder holds the data line permanently in the idle state (as a rule "high").
It is expected that the encoder has completed its own ramp-up by this time.
● If the encoder has not ramped up after approx. 10 seconds, the encoder evaluation
module signals a timeout error.
Commissioning Manual
Commissioning Manual, (IH1), 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AF00-0BP1
147
Commissioning
2.14 Notes on commissioning SSI encoders
The waiting period starts again when:
● The 5 V power supply is applied to the encoder.
● Switchover to 24 V power supply after completed ramp-up of the encoder evaluation in
accordance with the parameterized voltage level.
Note
There is a serial ramp-up (evaluation -> encoder) with the corresponding ramp-up times after
every disconnection and connection of the encoder.
Note
An external supply of the encoder with 24 V is permitted.
Parameterization
Predefined encoders
Several predefined SSI encoders are available for commissioning. These can be selected
from the STARTER's commissioning screens.
User-defined encoders
If there are no predefined entries for the encoder used, user-defined encoder data can be
entered on screens using the commissioning wizard.
Special settings
● Error bits (special case, several error bits)
If an SSI encoder has several error bits, the evaluation is activated in the list of experts as
follows using parameter p0434[x]:
Value = dcba
ba: Position of error bit in protocol (0 ... 63)
c: Level (0: Low level 1: High level)
d: Status of evaluation (0: Off, 1: On with 1 error bit, 2: On with 2 error bits ... 9: On with 9
error bits)
The following applies in the event of several error bits:
- The position specified under ba and the other bits are assigned in ascending order.
- The level set under c applies to all error bits.
Example:
p0434 = 1013
--> The evaluation is activated and the error bit is in position 13 and a low level.
p0434 = 1113
--> The evaluation is activated and the error bit is in position 13 and high level.
p0434 = 2124
--> The evaluation is activated and the 2 error bits are as of position 24 and high level
● Fine resolution p0418 and p0419
In order to make full use of the entire traversing range of the absolute encoder, the
position information, including fine resolution, must not exceed 32 bits.
Example:
An SSI encoder without incremental tracks is used. The encoder has a singleturn
resolution of 16 bits and a multiturn resolution of 14 bits. The absolute position's
resolution is therefore 30 bits.
Consequently, only a fine resolution of two bits can be set. Parameters p0418[x] and
p0419[x] in the list of experts should therefore be set to the value 2.
Commissioning Manual
148
Commissioning Manual, (IH1), 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AF00-0BP1
Commissioning
2.14 Notes on commissioning SSI encoders
Diagnostics
Example 1
An SSI encoder without incremental tracks is used. The encoder has a singleturn resolution
of 16 bits and a multiturn resolution of 14 bits. The fine resolution p0418[x] and p0419[x] is
set to the value 2. In parameter r0482[x] (X_IST1), the product is formed from "pulses per
revolution" and fine resolution p0418[x]. If using SSI encoders without incremental tracks, the
number of pulses and singleturn resolution are identical. In our example, the actual position
value X_IST1 (r0482[x]) must therefore have changed after an encoder resolution by the
value
singleturn resolution * fine resolution = 2^16 * 2^2 = 262144
.
Example 2
An SSI encoder with incremental tracks is used. In this case, incorrect SSI protocol settings
can be seen, e.g. by the fact that once the system has been switched on a different absolute
position is indicated from that before it was last deactivated.
The absolute position X_IST2 (r0483[x]) must be considered by way of a check. Following
PROFIdrive, however, just one value is displayed in this parameter if bit 13 (request absolute
value in cycles) is set to the value 1 in the encoder control word p0480[x].
This bit can be set, e.g. with the aid of the binector-connector converter.
Once switched on, the SSI encoder is now turned a few revolutions. Once switched off and
on again, the absolute position of X_IST2 (r0483[x]) must indicate an unchanged value. Only
minor deviations may occur in the fine resolution area.
Commissioning Manual
Commissioning Manual, (IH1), 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AF00-0BP1
149
Commissioning
2.15 Notes on the commissioning of a 2-pole resolver as absolute encoder
2.15
Notes on the commissioning of a 2-pole resolver as absolute
encoder
Description
You can use 2-pole (1 pole pair) resolvers as singleturn absolute encoders. The absolute
encoder position actual value is provided in Gn_XIST2 (r0483[x]).
Actual position value format
The factory setting for the fine resolution of Gn_XIST1 differs from the fine resolution in
Gn_XIST2 (p0418 = 11, p0419 = 9). This may cause a slight displacement of the encoder
position after switching the drive unit off/on.
Therefore, when using a 2-pole resolver as an absolute encoder, we recommend that the
fine resolution for Gn_XIST1 (p0418) is set the same as the fine resolution for Gn_XIST2
(p0419), e.g. p0418 = p0419 =11.
2-pole resolvers are automatically entered in the PROFIdrive profile (r0979) as singleturn
absolute encoders.
Position tracking
You can also activate position tracking for a 2-pole resolver. Please note, however, that the
resolver may not be moved more than half an encoder revolution (pole width) when switched
off. The activation and configuration of the position tracking is described in the chapter
"Position tracking".
EPOS - absolute encoder adjustment
If the 2-pole resolver is used as an absolute encoder for basic positioning (EPOS), the
absolute encoder adjustment must be performed:
● via STARTER (Basic positioner → Referencing) or
● via the expert list.
To do this, set reference point coordinate p2599 to the value corresponding to the
mechanical system and request the adjustment with p2507 = 2.
You will then need to back up the data from RAM to ROM.
Commissioning Manual
150
Commissioning Manual, (IH1), 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AF00-0BP1
Commissioning
2.16 Temperature sensors for SINAMICS components
2.16
Temperature sensors for SINAMICS components
The following table provides an overview of the SINAMICS drive system components
available with temperature sensor connections.
DANGER
Safe electrical separation of the temperature sensors
Only temperature sensors that meet the electrical separation specifications laid out in
EN 61800-5-1 may be connected to terminals "+Temp" and "-Temp". If safe electrical
separation cannot be guaranteed (e.g. for linear motors or third-party motors), a Sensor
Module External SME120, SME125 or the Terminal Module TM120 must be used. If these
instructions are not complied with, there is a risk of electric shock!
Table 2- 24
Temperature sensor connections for SINAMICS components
Module
Interface
Pin
Signal name
Technical specifications
SMC10/SMC20
X520 (sub D)
13
25
+Temp
- Temp
Temperature sensor
KTY84-1C130 / PTC
SMC30
X520 (sub D)
Temperature
channel 2
1
8
+Temp
- Temp
Temperature sensor
KTY84-1C130 / PTC / bimetallic
switch with NC contact
X531 (terminal)
temperature
channel 1
3
4
- Temp
+Temp
Temperature sensor
KTY84-1C130 / PTC / bimetallic
switch with NC contact
X23 (sub D)
1
8
+Temp
- Temp
Temperature sensor
KTY84–1C130 / PTC
X120 (terminal)
1
2
+Temp
- Temp
Temperature sensor
KTY84–1C130 / PTC
CUA31
X210 (terminal)
1
2
+Temp
- Temp
Temperature sensor
KTY84–1C130 / PTC
CUA32
X210 (terminal)
Temperature
channel 2
1
2
+Temp
- Temp
Temperature sensor
KTY84-1C130 / PTC / bimetallic
switch with NC contact
X220 (sub D)
Temperature
channel 1
1
8
+Temp
- Temp
Temperature sensor
KTY84-1C130 / PTC / bimetallic
switch with NC contact
TM31
X522 (terminal)
7
8
+Temp
- Temp
Temperature sensor
KTY84–1C130 / PTC
TM120
X524 (terminal)
1
2
- Temp
+Temp
3
4
- Temp
+Temp
Temperature sensor connection
KTY84-1C130 / PTC/bimetallic
switch with NC contact
5
6
- Temp
+Temp
7
8
- Temp
+Temp
CU310-2DP
CU310-2PN
for linear motor applications, here
the motor temperature sensor
connect KTY84-1C130
Commissioning Manual
Commissioning Manual, (IH1), 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AF00-0BP1
151
Commissioning
2.16 Temperature sensors for SINAMICS components
Module
Interface
Pin
Signal name
Technical specifications
SME20
Measuring system
interface
7
9
- Temp
+Temp
Temperature sensor
KTY84-1C130 / PTC
connection cable order number
6FX8002-2CA88- xxxx necessary
1)
SME120 /
SME125
Active Line Module
Smart Line Module
Basic Line Module
Motor Module
X200 (connector)
Temperature
channel 2
1
2
- Temp
+Temp
Temperature sensor
KTY84-1C130 / PTC / bimetallic
switch with NC contact
X200 (connector)
Temperature
channel 3
3
4
+Temp
- Temp
Temperature sensor
KTY84-1C130 / PTC / bimetallic
switch with NC contact
X200 (connector)
Temperature
channel 4
5
6
+Temp
- Temp
Temperature sensor
KTY84-1C130 / PTC / bimetallic
switch with NC contact
Booksize
X21 (terminal)
1
2
+Temp
- Temp
Chassis
X41 (terminal)
4
3
+Temp
- Temp
Active Line Module temperature
sensor
Temperature switch type:
bimetallic switch with NC contact
Booksize
X21 (terminal)
1
2
+Temp
- Temp
Chassis
X41 (terminal)
4
3
+Temp
- Temp
Booksize
X21 (terminal)
1
2
+Temp
- Temp
Chassis
X41 (terminal)
4
3
+Temp
- Temp
Booksize
X21/X22 (terminal)
1
2
+Temp
- Temp
Temperature sensor
KTY84–1C130 / PTC
The following
applies to chassis:
X41 (terminal)
4
3
+Temp
- Temp
Bimetallic switch with NC contact:
Alarm and timer (only for
temperature evaluation via MM)
Active Line Module temperature
sensor
Temperature switch type:
bimetallic switch with NC contact
Basic Line Module temperature
sensor Temperature switch type:
bimetallic switch with NC contact
PT100 temperature sensor
1)
Cable for connection to direct measurement systems: Order number 6FXx002-2CB54-xxxx
Commissioning Manual
152
Commissioning Manual, (IH1), 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AF00-0BP1
Commissioning
2.16 Temperature sensors for SINAMICS components
Commissioning information
The index [0..n] used in the following identifies either the motor data set or the encoder data
set.
SMC10/SMC20
You can use the STARTER screen (\signals and monitoring \ motor temperature) to
parameterize the motor temperature evaluation via SUB-D socket X520.
SMC30 (from Order No. 6SL3055-0AA00-5CA2)
In addition to temperature evaluation via terminal X531 (temperature channel 1), this module
also has temperature evaluation at SUB-D socket X520 (temperature channel 2).
At the default setting (p0600 = 1 "Temperature via encoder 1" and p0601 = 2 "KTY") the
temperature is evaluated via the first temperature channel. The temperature sensor is
connected to terminal X531 on the SMC30. The temperature is shown via r0035.
The parameterization of the motor temperature evaluation via the sub D socket X520 must
be performed in the expert list as follows:
● p0600[0..n]: Selection of the encoder (1, 2 or 3) to which the SMC30, that is used for the
temperature evaluation, is assigned (n = motor data set).
● p0601[0..n] = 10 (evaluation via several temperature channels), n = motor data set.
● p4601[0..n]: Select the temperature sensor type for temperature channel 2 (depends on
encoder data set n, not motor data set).
Note
With several encoders, the index [n] of the relevant encoder / encoder data set, via which
the temperature evaluation is performed, must be used.
The temperature is displayed in parameter r4620[1] (temperature channel 2). For multiple
temperature channels (use of temperature channels 1 and 2 on SMC30), parameter r0035
shows the maximum temperature.
Example:
A KTY temperature sensor is connected at the sub D socket X520 on the SMC30 of Encoder
1.
This is parameterized via:
● p0600[0..n] = 1 / p0601[0..n] = 10 / p4601[0..n] = 20
Both temperature channels (X520 and X531) can be used at the same time. In addition to
the above parameterization, the sensor type of the temperature sensor connected at terminal
X531 must be entered in p4600[0..n]. The maximum value is then generated for the motor
temperature and displayed in r0035.
Note
With several encoders, the index [n] of the relevant encoder / encoder data set, via which the
temperature evaluation is performed, must be used.
Commissioning Manual
Commissioning Manual, (IH1), 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AF00-0BP1
153
Commissioning
2.16 Temperature sensors for SINAMICS components
CU310-2DP / CU310-2PN
The Control Unit 310-2 has an integrated SMC30 encoder interface. This encoder interface
is accessed via the 15-pin Sub-D-contact X23 and is evaluated as temperature channel 1.
There are three options available to evaluate the temperature:
1. Temperature channel 1 via the SMC30 encoder interface X23.
2. Temperature channel 1 via terminal X120, for example, if an encoder is being used.
3. Two temperature channels via X23 and X120. Encoder interface X23 is assigned to
temperature channel 1 and terminal X120 is assigned to temperature channel 2.
The following parameter settings must be made:
For 1. One temperature channel 1 via encoder interface X23:
● p0600[0..n] = 1: Selects the encoder (1, 2 or 3), which is assigned to encoder interface
X23 and via which the temperature is evaluated (n = motor data set).
● p0601[0..n] = 1 or 2: Selection of the temperature sensor type, n = motor data set
● r0035: Display of the temperature value.
For 2. One temperature channel 1 via terminal X120:
● p0600[0..n] = 11: Activation from temperature channel 1 via terminal X120
● p0601[0..n] = 1 or 2: Selection of the temperature sensor type, n = motor data set
● r0035: Display of the temperature value.
For 3. Two temperature channels via X23 and X120:
● p0600[0..n] = 1: Selects the encoder (1, 2 or 3), which is assigned to encoder interface
X23 and via which the temperature is evaluated (n = motor data set).
● p0601[0..n] = 10: Evaluation via several temperature channels
● p4600[0..n]: Selection of the temperature sensor type from temperature channel 1, n =
encoder data set
● p4601[0..n]: Selection of the temperature sensor type from temperature channel 2, n =
encoder data set
● r4620[0...3]: Reading the temperature values.
– Index n = 0 temperature channel 1
– Index n = 1 temperature channel 2
● r0035: Display of the higher temperature value of temperature channels 1 and 2.
CUA31
The parameterization of the temperature evaluation via terminal X210 can be performed
using the STARTER screen (signals and monitoring \ motor temperature). "Temperature
sensor via Motor Module (11)" should be selected in the "Temperature sensor selection"
field. The temperature of the sensor is displayed in r0035.
Commissioning Manual
154
Commissioning Manual, (IH1), 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AF00-0BP1
Commissioning
2.16 Temperature sensors for SINAMICS components
CUA32
The parameterization of the temperature evaluation via terminal X210 or sub D socket X220
is performed using two temperature channels.
p0600 = 11: Temperature sensor via Motor Module
For the SINAMICS S120 AC Drive (AC/AC) and if Control Unit Adapter CUA31/CUA32 is
used, the temperature sensor connection is on the adapter (X210).
TM31
With Terminal Module TM31, the sensor type used is set via p4100 and the temperature
signal interconnected via r4105.
SME20
The evaluation of KTY or PTC temperature sensors can be parameterized using the
STARTER screen (\Signals and monitoring \ Motor temperature):
● Temperature sensor selection (≙ p0600[0..n]): Selection of the source to which the SME
module is assigned (temperature sensor via encoder (1, 2 or 3), temperature sensor via
BICO interconnections or temperature sensor via Motor Module)
● Temperature sensor type (≙ p0601[0..n]): Sets the sensor type for motor temperature
monitoring.
Figure 2-43
Selection of temperature sensor for SME20 modules
Commissioning Manual
Commissioning Manual, (IH1), 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AF00-0BP1
155
Commissioning
2.16 Temperature sensors for SINAMICS components
SME120/SME125
For modules with several temperature sensor connections (SME Modules), the temperature
sensor is selected depending on encoder data set n via parameters p4601[0..n]..p4603[0..n].
A maximum of three motor temperature sensors can be evaluated simultaneously via
terminal X200.
The parameterization of the motor temperature evaluation via terminal X200 must be
performed in the expert list as follows:
● p0600[0..n]: Selection of the encoder (1, 2 or 3) to which the SME Module, that is used
for the temperature evaluation, is assigned (n = motor data set).
● p0601[0..n] = 10 (evaluation via several temperature channels), n = motor data set.
● p4601[0..n]-p4603[0..n]: Select the temperature sensor type of temperature channel 2-4,
depending on encoder data set n.
Only temperature channels 2-4 are available at terminal X200.
● Parameter r4620[0...3] Motor temperatures SME
is used to display the current temperatures in the motor, measured via an SME120 or
SME125. The indices mean:
[1] = SME temperature channel 2 / motor temperature sensor 2
[2] = SME temperature channel 3 / motor temperature sensor 3
[3] = SME temperature channel 4 / motor temperature sensor 4
Diagnostic parameters r0458[0...2] Sensor Module properties
Index [0...2]: Encoder 1...encoder 3
Parameter r0458 allows the following properties to be queried at the temperature sensor
modules:
Bit
Feature
02
Temperature sensor connection present
03
Connection for PTC for motors with DRIVE-CLiQ also present
04
Module temperature available
08
Evaluation set up across several temperature channels
Selection of several temperature channels p4601 .. p4603 is only possible, for example,
when parameter p0601 = 10 is set. This can be checked using the entry r0458.8 = 1.
You can find further information on parameter r0458 in: SINAMICS S 120/S150 List Manual.
Active Line Module, Basic Line Module, Smart Line Module, Motor Module (chassis)
Parameter p0601 "Motor temperature sensor type" enables the setting for the sensor type for
the temperature measurement at input X21 (booksize) or X41 (chassis). The measured
value is displayed in r0035.
Commissioning Manual
156
Commissioning Manual, (IH1), 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AF00-0BP1
Commissioning
2.16 Temperature sensors for SINAMICS components
Faults and alarms
F07011 drive: Motor overtemperature
KTY sensor:
The motor temperature has exceeded the fault threshold (p0605) or the timer stage (p0606)
after the alarm threshold was exceeded (p0604) has expired.
This results in the reaction parameterized in p0610.
PTC sensor + bimetallic switch:
The response threshold of 1650 Ohm was exceeded and the timer stage (p0606) has
expired.
This results in the reaction parameterized in p0610.
If an SME Module is used (p0601 = 10), parameter r949 displays the number of the sensor
channel that has triggered the message.
A07015 drive: Motor temperature sensor alarm
An error was detected when evaluating the temperature sensor set in p0600 and p0601.
When the fault occurs, the time in p0607 is started. If the fault is still present after this time
has expired, fault F07016 is output – however, not until at least 50 ms after alarm A07015.
If an SME Module is used (p0601 = 10), parameter r2124 displays the number of the sensor
channel that has triggered the message.
F07016 drive: Motor temperature sensor fault
An error was detected when evaluating the temperature sensor set in p0600 and p0601.
If alarm A07015 is present, the time in p0607 is started. If the fault is still present after this
time has expired, fault F07016 is output – however, not until at least 50 ms after alarm
A07015.
If an SME Module is used (p0601 = 10), parameter r949 displays the number of the sensor
channel that has triggered the message.
Function diagrams (see SINAMICS S120/S150 List Manual)
● 8016 Signals and monitoring - Thermal monitoring of motor
Commissioning Manual
Commissioning Manual, (IH1), 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AF00-0BP1
157
Commissioning
2.16 Temperature sensors for SINAMICS components
Overview of important parameters (see SINAMICS S120/S150 List Manual)
● r0035 CO: Motor temperature
● r0458[0...2] Sensor Module properties
● p0600[0..n] Motor temperature sensor for monitoring
● p0601[0..n] Motor temperature sensor type
● p0601 Motor temperature sensor type
● p0603 CI: Motor temperature signal source
● p0604[0...n] Motor temperature alarm threshold
● p0605[0...n] Motor temperature fault threshold
● p0606[0...n] Motor temperature timer stage
● p0607[0...n] Temperature sensor fault timer stage
● p0610[0...n] Motor overtemperature reaction
● P4100[0...3] TM120 temperature evaluation sensor type
● p4100 TM31 temperature evaluation sensor type
● r4105[0...3] CO:TM120 temperature evaluation actual value
● r4105 CO:TM31 temperature evaluation actual value
● p4600[0...n] Motor temperature sensor 1 sensor type
● p4601[0...n] Motor temperature sensor 2 sensor type
● p4602[0...n] Motor temperature sensor 3 sensor type
● p4603[0...n] Motor temperature sensor 4 sensor type
● r4620[0...3] Motor temperatures SME / Mot Temp SME, n = channel 1-4
Commissioning Manual
158
Commissioning Manual, (IH1), 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AF00-0BP1
3
Diagnostics
This chapter describes the following diagnostic features of the SINAMICS S drive system:
● Diagnostics via LEDs
● Diagnostics via STARTER
● Diagnostic buffer
● Fault and alarm messages
3.1
Diagnostics via LEDs
3.1.1
Control Units
3.1.1.1
Description of the LED states of a CU 320-2
The various states of the Control Units CU320-2DP and CU320-3PN during power-up and
during operation are displayed using LEDs on the Control Unit. The duration of the individual
statuses varies.
Table 3- 1
LEDs
LED
Function
RDY
Ready
DP / PN
PROFIdrive cyclic operation via PROFIBUS (DP) or PROFINET (PN)
OPT
OPTION
● If an error occurs, the booting procedure is terminated and the cause is indicated
accordingly via the LEDs.
● Once the unit has successfully booted up, all the LEDs are switched off briefly.
● Once the unit has booted up, the LEDs are controlled via the loaded software.
Commissioning Manual
Commissioning Manual, (IH1), 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AF00-0BP1
159
Diagnostics
3.1 Diagnostics via LEDs
3.1.1.2
Control Unit 320-2DP during booting
Table 3- 2
Load software
LED
State
Comment
Hardware reset
RDY LED lights up red, all other LEDs light
up orange
RDY
DP
OPT
Red
Orange
Orange
Reset
Red
Red
Off
BIOS loaded
–
Red
flashing
light 2 Hz
Red
Off
BIOS error

Error occurred while loading the BIOS
Red
flashing
light 2 Hz
Red
flashing light
2 Hz
Off
File error

Memory card not inserted or faulty

Software on memory card not present
or corrupted
Red
Orange
flashing light
Off
FW loading
RDY LED lights up red, PN LED flashes
orange without fixed frequency
Red
Off
Off
FW loaded
-
Off
Red
Off
FW checked
(no CRC error)
Red
flashing
light 0.5
Hz
Red flashing
light 0.5 Hz
Off
FW checked
(CRC error)
Table 3- 3

CRC invalid
Firmware
State
LED
RDY
DP
OPT
Orange
Off
Off
Alternating
Initializing
Running
Comment
–
See the table below
Commissioning Manual
160
Commissioning Manual, (IH1), 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AF00-0BP1
Diagnostics
3.1 Diagnostics via LEDs
3.1.1.3
Table 3- 4
Control Unit 320-2DP in operation
Control Unit CU320-2 DP – Description of the LEDs after booting
LED
Color
RDY (READY) -
State
Description, cause
Remedy
OFF
Electronic power supply is missing or outside
permissible tolerance range.
Check power supply
Continuous
light
The component is ready for operation and cyclic
DRIVE-CLiQ communication is taking place.
–
Flashing
light
0.5 Hz
Commissioning / reset
–
Flashing
light
2 Hz
Writing to the memory card
–
Red
Flashing
light
2 Hz
General errors
Check
parameterization/configuratio
n data
Red/
green
Flashing
light
0.5 Hz
Control Unit is ready for operation.
However there are no software licenses.
Obtain licenses
Orange
Flashing
light
0.5 Hz
Updating the firmware of the DRIVE-CLiQ
components
–
Flashing
light
2 Hz
DRIVE-CLiQ component firmware update
complete. Wait for POWER ON for the
components in question.
Turn POWER ON for the
components in question
Flashing
light
2 Hz
Component detection via LED is activated
(p0124[0]).
–
Green
Green /
orange
or
red /
orange
Note:
Both options depend on the LED state when
component detection is activated via
p0124[0] = 1.
Commissioning Manual
Commissioning Manual, (IH1), 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AF00-0BP1
161
Diagnostics
3.1 Diagnostics via LEDs
LED
DP
PROFIdrive
cyclic
operation
Color
–
Description, cause
Cyclic communication has not (yet) taken place.
Remedy
–
Note:
The PROFIdrive is ready to communicate when
the Control Unit is ready to operate (see LED
RDY).
Green
Red
OPT
(OPTION)
State
Off
–
Continuous
light
Cyclic communication is taking place.
–
Flashing
light
0.5 Hz
Full cyclic communication has not yet taken
place.
–
Possible causes:

The controller is not transferring any
setpoints.

During isochronous operation, no global
control (GC) or a faulty global control (GC) is
transferred by the controller.
Flashing
light
0.5 Hz
PROFIBUS master is sending wrong
parameterization/configuration data
Adapt configuration between
master/controller and CU
Flashing
light
2 Hz
Cyclic bus communication has been interrupted
or could not be established
Remedy fault
Off
Electronic power supply is missing or outside
permissible tolerance range.
Check power supply and/or
component
Component is not ready.
Option board not installed or no associated drive
object has been created.
Green
Continuous
light
Option board is ready.
–
Flashing
light
0.5 Hz
Depends on the option board used.
–
Red
Flashing
light
2 Hz
There is at least one fault of this component.
The Option Board is not ready (e.g. after
switching on).
Remedy and acknowledge
fault
RDY and DP
Red
Flashing
light
2 Hz
Bus error - communication has been interrupted
Remedy fault
RDY and OPT
Orange
Flashing
light
0.5 Hz
Firmware update in progress for connected
Option Board CBE20
-
Commissioning Manual
162
Commissioning Manual, (IH1), 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AF00-0BP1
Diagnostics
3.1 Diagnostics via LEDs
3.1.1.4
Control Unit 320-2PN while booting
Table 3- 5
Load software
LED
State
Comment
Hardware reset
RDY LED lights up red, all other LEDs light
up orange
RDY
PN
OPT
Red
Orange
Orange
Reset
Red
Red
Off
BIOS loaded
–
Red
flashing
light 2 Hz
Red
Off
BIOS error

Error occurred while loading the BIOS
Red
Off
File error

Memory card not inserted or faulty

Software on memory card not present
or corrupted
Red
flashing
light 2 Hz
flashing light
2 Hz
Red
Orange
flashing light
Off
FW loading
RDY LED lights up red, PN LED flashes
orange without fixed frequency
Red
Off
Off
FW loaded
–
Off
Red
Off
FW checked
(no CRC error)
Red
flashing
light 0.5 Hz
Red flashing
light 0.5 Hz
Off
FW checked
(CRC error)
Table 3- 6

CRC invalid
Firmware
State
LED
RDY
PN
OPT
Orange
Off
Off
Alternating
Initializing
Running
Comment
–
See the table below
Commissioning Manual
Commissioning Manual, (IH1), 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AF00-0BP1
163
Diagnostics
3.1 Diagnostics via LEDs
3.1.1.5
Table 3- 7
Control Unit 320-2PN in operation
Control Unit CU320-2 PN – Description of the LEDs after booting
LED
Color
RDY (READY) -
Status
Description, cause
Remedy
OFF
Electronics power supply is missing or outside
permissible tolerance range.
Check power supply
Continuous
light
The component is ready for operation and cyclic
DRIVE-CLiQ communication is taking place.
–
Flashing
light
0.5 Hz
Commissioning/reset
–
Flashing
light
2 Hz
Writing to the memory card
–
Red
Flashing
light
2 Hz
General errors
Check
parameterization/configuratio
n data
Red/
green
Flashing
light
0.5 Hz
Control Unit is ready for operation.
However there are no software licenses.
Obtain licenses
Orange
Flashing
light
0.5 Hz
Updating the firmware of the DRIVE-CLiQ
components
–
Flashing
light
2 Hz
DRIVE-CLiQ component firmware update
complete. Wait for POWER ON for the
components in question.
Turn POWER ON for the
components in question
Flashing
light
2 Hz
Component detection via LED is activated
(p0124[0]).
–
Green
Green/
orange
or
red/
orange
Note:
Both options depend on the LED status when
component detection is activated via
p0124[0] = 1.
Commissioning Manual
164
Commissioning Manual, (IH1), 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AF00-0BP1
Diagnostics
3.1 Diagnostics via LEDs
LED
DP
PROFIdrive
cyclic
operation
Color
–
Description, cause
Cyclic communication has not (yet) taken place.
Remedy
–
Note:
The PROFIdrive is ready to communicate when
the Control Unit is ready to operate (see LED
RDY).
Green
Red
OPT
(OPTION)
Status
Off
–
Continuous
light
Cyclic communication is taking place.
–
Flashing
light
0.5 Hz
Full cyclic communication has not yet taken
place.
–
Possible causes:

The controller is not transferring any
setpoints.

During isochronous operation, no global
control (GC) or a faulty global control (GC) is
transferred by the controller.
Flashing
light
0.5 Hz
Bus error,
incorrect parameter assignment/configuration
Adapt configuration between
controller and devices
Flashing
light
2 Hz
Cyclic bus communication has been interrupted
or could not be established
Remedy fault
Off
Electronics power supply is missing or outside
permissible tolerance range.
Check power supply and/or
component
Component is not ready.
Option board not installed or no associated drive
object has been created.
Green
Continuous
light
Option board is ready.
–
Flashing
light
0.5 Hz
Depends on the option board used.
–
Red
Flashing
light
2 Hz
At least one fault is present in this component.
Option Board not ready (e.g. after power-on).
Remedy and acknowledge
fault
RDY and DP
Red
Flashing
light
2 Hz
Bus error - communication has been interrupted
Remedy fault
RDY and OPT
Orange
Flashing
light
0.5 Hz
Firmware update in progress for connected
Option Board CBE20
-
Commissioning Manual
Commissioning Manual, (IH1), 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AF00-0BP1
165
Diagnostics
3.1 Diagnostics via LEDs
3.1.1.6
Description of the LED states of a CU 310-2
There are four LEDs on the front panel of the CU310-2 DP's housing (see section:
"Overview", illustration: "CU310-2 DP Interface overview").
Table 3- 8
LEDs
RDY
Ready
COM
Option Board
OUT>5V
Encoder current supply > 5 V (TTL/HTL)
MOD
Operating mode (reserved)
The various LEDs are switched on and off as the control unit is powered up (depending on
the phase the system is currently running through). When switched on, the color of the LEDs
shows the status of the corresponding power-up phase (see section: "LED display during
power up").
In the event of a fault, power up will be ended in the corresponding phase. The LEDs that
are switched on retain their colors so that the fault can be determined on the basis of the
combination of the color LEDs that are lit and unlit.
All the LEDs go out briefly if the CU310-2 DP has powered up without error. The system is
ready for operation when the LED "RDY" is permanently green.
All the LEDs are controlled by the software loaded during operation (see section: "LED
display during operation").
Commissioning Manual
166
Commissioning Manual, (IH1), 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AF00-0BP1
Diagnostics
3.1 Diagnostics via LEDs
3.1.1.7
Control Unit 310-2DP during booting
Table 3- 9
Load software
State
LED
RDY
COM
OUT>5V
MOD
Orange
Orange
Off
Red
Reset
Red
Red
Off
Off
BIOS loaded
Red
flashing light 2 Hz
Red
Off
Off
BIOS error
Red
flashing light 2 Hz
Red
flashing light 2 Hz
Off
Off
File error
Table 3- 10
Comment
Hardware reset
Error occurred while loading the
BIOS
Memory card not inserted or faulty
Software on memory card not
present or corrupted
Firmware
LED
State
Comment
RDY
COM
OUT>5V
MOD
Red
Orange
Off
Off
Firmware loading
COM-LED flashing without
specific flashing frequency
Red
Off
Off
Off
Firmware loaded
-
Off
Red
Off
Off
Firmware check
(no CRC error)
-
Red
Flashing light
0.5 Hz
Red
Flashing light
0.5 Hz
Off
Off
Firmware check
(CRC error)
CRC is incorrect
Orange
Off
Off
Off
Firmware
initialization
-
Commissioning Manual
Commissioning Manual, (IH1), 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AF00-0BP1
167
Diagnostics
3.1 Diagnostics via LEDs
3.1.1.8
Table 3- 11
Control Unit 310-2DP in operation
Description of the LEDs during operation of the CU310-2 DP
LED
Color
State
Description / cause
Remedy
RDY
(READY)
-
Off
Electronic power supply is missing or outside
permissible tolerance range.
Check the power
supply
Continuous light
The unit is ready for operation.
Cyclic DRIVE-CLiQ communication is in progress.
-
Flashing light
0.5 Hz
Commissioning / reset
-
Flashing light 2
Hz
Writing to the memory card.
-
Flashing light
2 Hz
General errors
Check parameter
assignment /
configuration
Red / green Flashing light
0.5 Hz
The Control Unit is ready for operation, but there
are no software licenses.
Install the missing
licenses.
Flashing light
0.5 Hz
The firmware of the DRIVE-CLiQ components is
being updated.
-
Flashing light
2 Hz
DRIVE-CLiQ component firmware update
completed. Waiting for POWER ON of the
corresponding components.
Switch on the
component.
Detection of the component via LED is activated
(p0124[0]).
Note:
Both options depend on the LED state when
activating via p0124[0] = 1.
-
Off
Cyclic communication is not (yet) running.
Note: The PROFIdrive is ready for communication
when the Control Unit is ready for operation (see
LED: RDY).
-
Continuous light
Cyclic communication is taking place.
-
Flashing light
0.5 Hz
Cyclic communication is not fully established yet.
Possible causes:
- The controller is not transmitting any setpoints.
- In isochronous mode, the controller is not sending
a GC (Global Control) or is sending a defective GC
Flashing light
0.5 Hz
The PROFIBUS master is sending a faulty
parameter assignment or the configuration file is
corrupted.
Modify the
configuration between
the master / controller
and Control Unit.
Flashing light
2 Hz
Cyclic bus communication has been interrupted or
could not be established.
Rectify the bus
communication fault.
Green
Red
Orange
Green /
orange
or
red /
orange
COM
-
Green
Red
Flashing light
2 Hz
MOD
-
Off
-
-
OUT > 5 V
-
Off
-
-
Orange
Continuous light
The voltage of the electronic power supply for the
measuring system is 24 V. 1)
1) Make sure that the connected encoder is designed for a 24 V supply. Connecting a 5 V encoder to a 24 V supply can
result in destruction of the encoder electronics.
Commissioning Manual
168
Commissioning Manual, (IH1), 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AF00-0BP1
Diagnostics
3.1 Diagnostics via LEDs
3.1.1.9
Control Unit 310-2PN while booting
Table 3- 12
Load software
State
LED
RDY
COM
OUT>5V
MOD
Orange
Orange
Off
Red
Reset
Red
Red
Off
Off
BIOS loaded
Red
flashing light 2 Hz
Red
Off
Off
BIOS error
Red
flashing light 2 Hz
Red
flashing light 2 Hz
Off
Off
File error
Table 3- 13
Comment
Hardware reset
Error occurred while loading the
BIOS
Memory card not inserted or faulty
Software on memory card not
present or corrupted
Firmware
LED
State
Comment
RDY
COM
OUT>5V
MOD
Red
Orange
Off
Off
Firmware loading
Red
Off
Off
Off
Firmware loaded
-
Off
Red
Off
Off
Firmware check
(no CRC error)
-
Red
Flashing light 0.5
Hz
Red
Flashing light 0.5
Hz
Off
Off
Firmware check
(CRC error)
CRC is incorrect
Orange
Off
Off
Off
Firmware
initialization
COM-LED flashing without
specific flashing frequency
-
Commissioning Manual
Commissioning Manual, (IH1), 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AF00-0BP1
169
Diagnostics
3.1 Diagnostics via LEDs
3.1.1.10
Table 3- 14
Control Unit 310-2PN in operation
Description of the LEDs during operation of the CU310-2 PN
LED
Color
State
Description / cause
Remedy
RDY
-
Off
Electronic power supply is missing or outside
permissible tolerance range.
Check the power
supply
Continuous light
The unit is ready for operation.
Cyclic DRIVE-CLiQ communication is in
progress.
-
Flashing light 0.5
Hz
Commissioning / reset
-
Flashing light 2 Hz
Writing to the memory card.
-
Flashing light
2 Hz
General errors
Check parameter
assignment /
configuration
Red / green Flashing light
0.5 Hz
The control unit is ready for operation, but there
are no software licenses.
Install the missing
licenses.
Flashing light
0.5 Hz
The firmware of the DRIVE-CLiQ components is
being updated.
-
Flashing light
2 Hz
DRIVE-CLiQ component firmware update
completed. Waiting for POWER ON of the
corresponding components.
Switch on the
component.
Green /
orange
or
red /
orange
Flashing light
2 Hz
Detection of the component via LED is activated
(p0124[0]).
Note:
Both options depend on the LED state when
activating via p0124[0] = 1.
-
-
Off
Cyclic communication is not (yet) running.
Note: The PROFIdrive is ready for
communication when the Control Unit is ready
for operation (see LED: RDY).
-
Continuous light
Cyclic communication is taking place.
-
Flashing light
0.5 Hz
Cyclic communication is not fully established yet. Possible causes:
- The controller is not transmitting any setpoints.
- In isochronous mode, the controller is not
sending a GC (Global Control) or is sending a
defective GC.
Flashing light
0.5 Hz
The PROFIBUS master is sending a faulty
parameter assignment or the configuration file is
corrupted.
Modify the configuration between master
/controller and CU
Flashing light
2 Hz
Cyclic bus communication has been interrupted
or could not be established.
Rectify the bus
communication fault.
(READY)
Green
Red
Orange
COM
Green
Red
MOD
-
Off
-
-
OUT > 5 V
-
Off
-
-
Orange
Continuous light
The voltage of the electronic power supply for
the measuring system is 24 V. 1)
1) Make sure that the connected encoder is designed for a 24 V supply. Connecting a 5 V encoder to a 24 V supply can
result in destruction of the encoder electronics.
Commissioning Manual
170
Commissioning Manual, (IH1), 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AF00-0BP1
Diagnostics
3.1 Diagnostics via LEDs
3.1.2
Power units
3.1.2.1
Active Line Module booksize
Table 3- 15
Meaning of the LEDs on the Active Line Module
State
Ready
Description, cause
Remedy
DC link
Off
Off
Electronic power supply is missing or outside
permissible tolerance range.
Green
Off
The component is ready for operation and cyclic DRIVE- –
CLiQ communication is taking place.
Orange
The component is ready for operation and cyclic DRIVE- –
CLiQ communication is taking place.
The DC link voltage is present.
Red
The component is ready for operation and cyclic DRIVE- Check the line voltage
CLiQ communication is taking place.
The DC link voltage is too high.
Orange
Orange
DRIVE-CLiQ communication is being established.
–
Red
–
This component has at least one fault.
Remedy and acknowledge
fault
Note:
The LED is activated regardless of whether the
corresponding messages have been reconfigured.
–
Green / red
flashing light
0.5 Hz
-
Firmware is being downloaded.
–
Green / red
flashing light 2
Hz
-
Firmware download is complete. Wait for POWER ON.
Carry out a POWER ON
Green /
orange
–
Component detection via LED is activated (p0124).
–
or
Red / orange
Note:
Both options depend on the LED state when activated
via p0124 = 1.
DANGER
Hazardous DC link voltages may be present at any time regardless of the state of the "DC
link" LED.
The warning information on the component must be carefully observed!
Commissioning Manual
Commissioning Manual, (IH1), 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AF00-0BP1
171
Diagnostics
3.1 Diagnostics via LEDs
3.1.2.2
Table 3- 16
Basic Line Module booksize
Meaning of the LEDs on the Basic Line Module
State
Ready
Description, cause
Remedy
DC link
off
off
Electronic power supply is missing or outside
permissible tolerance range.
Green
off
The component is ready for operation and cyclic DRIVE- –
CLiQ communication is taking place.
Orange
The component is ready for operation and cyclic DRIVE- –
CLiQ communication is taking place.
The DC link voltage is present.
Red
The component is ready for operation and cyclic DRIVE- Check the line voltage.
CLiQ communication is taking place.
The DC link voltage is too high.
Orange
Orange
DRIVE-CLiQ communication is being established.
–
Red
–
This component has at least one fault.
Remedy and acknowledge
fault.
Note:
The LED is activated regardless of whether the
corresponding messages have been reconfigured.
–
Green / red
flashing light
0.5 Hz
–
Firmware is being downloaded.
–
Green / red
flashing light 2
Hz
-
Firmware download is complete. Wait for POWER ON.
Carry out a POWER ON
Green /
orange
–
Component detection via LED is activated (p0124).
–
or
Red / orange
flashing light
Note:
Both options depend on the LED state when activated
via p0124 = 1.
DANGER
Hazardous DC link voltages may be present at any time regardless of the state of the "DC
link" LED.
The warning information on the component must be carefully observed!
Commissioning Manual
172
Commissioning Manual, (IH1), 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AF00-0BP1
Diagnostics
3.1 Diagnostics via LEDs
3.1.2.3
Smart Line Modules booksize 5 kW and 10 kW
Table 3- 17
Meaning of the LEDs at the Smart Line Modules 5 kW and 10 kW
LED
READY
DC LINK
Color
State
Description, cause
Remedy
–
Off
Electronic power supply is missing or outside
permissible tolerance range.
–
Green
Continuous
light
Component is ready to operate.
–
Yellow
Continuous
light
Pre-charging not yet complete.
bypass relay dropped out
EP terminals not supplied with 24 VDC.
–
Red
Continuous
light
Overtemperature
Overcurrent
Diagnose fault (via output
terminals) and
acknowledge it (via input
terminal)
–
Off
Electronic power supply is missing or outside
permissible tolerance range.
–
Yellow
Continuous
light
DC link voltage within permissible tolerance range.
–
Red
Continuous
light
DC link voltage outside permissible tolerance range.
Line supply fault.
Check the line voltage.
DANGER
Hazardous DC link voltages may be present at any time regardless of the state of the "DC
link" LED.
The warning information on the component must be carefully observed!
Commissioning Manual
Commissioning Manual, (IH1), 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AF00-0BP1
173
Diagnostics
3.1 Diagnostics via LEDs
3.1.2.4
Table 3- 18
Smart Line Modules booksize 16 kW to 55 kW
Meaning of the LEDs at the Smart Line Modules ≥ 16 kW
State
Ready
Description, cause
Remedy
DC link
Off
Off
Electronic power supply is missing or outside
permissible tolerance range.
Green
Off
The component is ready for operation and cyclic DRIVE- –
CLiQ communication is taking place.
Orange
The component is ready for operation and cyclic DRIVE- –
CLiQ communication is taking place.
The DC link voltage is present.
Red
The component is ready for operation and cyclic DRIVE- Check the line voltage
CLiQ communication is taking place.
The DC link voltage is too high.
Orange
Orange
DRIVE-CLiQ communication is being established.
–
Red
–
This component has at least one fault.
Remedy and acknowledge
fault
Note:
The LED is activated regardless of whether the
corresponding messages have been reconfigured.
–
Green / red
flashing light
0.5 Hz
–
Firmware is being downloaded.
–
Green / red
flashing light 2
Hz
-
Firmware download is complete. Wait for POWER ON.
Carry out a POWER ON
Green /
orange
–
Component detection via LED is activated (p0124).
–
or
Red / orange
flashing light
Note:
Both options depend on the LED state when activated
via p0124 = 1.
DANGER
Hazardous DC link voltages may be present at any time regardless of the state of the "DC
link" LED.
The warning information on the component must be carefully observed!
Commissioning Manual
174
Commissioning Manual, (IH1), 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AF00-0BP1
Diagnostics
3.1 Diagnostics via LEDs
3.1.2.5
Table 3- 19
Single Motor Module / Double Motor Module / Power Module
Meaning of the LEDs on the Motor Module
State
Ready
Description, cause
Remedy
DC link
Off
Off
Electronic power supply is missing or outside
permissible tolerance range.
Green
Off
The component is ready for operation and cyclic DRIVE- –
CLiQ communication is taking place.
Orange
The component is ready for operation and cyclic DRIVE- –
CLiQ communication is taking place.
The DC link voltage is present.
Red
The component is ready for operation and cyclic DRIVE- Check the line voltage
CLiQ communication is taking place.
The DC link voltage is too high.
Orange
Orange
DRIVE-CLiQ communication is being established.
–
Red
–
This component has at least one fault.
Remedy and acknowledge
fault
Note:
The LED is activated regardless of whether the
corresponding messages have been reconfigured.
–
Green / red
flashing light
0.5 Hz
–
Firmware is being downloaded.
–
Green / red
flashing light
2 Hz
–
Firmware download is complete. Wait for POWER ON.
Carry out a POWER ON
Green /
orange
–
Component detection via LED is activated (p0124).
–
or
Red / orange
Note:
Both options depend on the LED state when activated
via p0124 = 1.
DANGER
Hazardous DC link voltages may be present at any time regardless of the state of the "DC
link" LED.
The warning information on the component must be carefully observed!
Commissioning Manual
Commissioning Manual, (IH1), 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AF00-0BP1
175
Diagnostics
3.1 Diagnostics via LEDs
3.1.2.6
Braking Modules booksize format
Table 3- 20
Meaning of the LEDs on the Braking Module booksize
LED
READY
Color
State
Description, cause
Remedy
-
Off
Electronic power supply is missing or outside permissible
tolerance range.
–
Green
Continuous
light
Component is ready to operate.
–
Red
Continuous
light
Enable signal missing (input terminal)
Overtemperature
Overcurrent trip
I2t monitoring responded
Ground fault/short circuit
Diagnose fault (via
output terminals) and
acknowledge it (via
input terminal)
Component deactivated via terminal.
Note:
In the event of an overtemperature, the error cannot be
acknowledged until a cooling time has elapsed.
DC LINK
3.1.2.7
Table 3- 21
-
Off
There is no DC link voltage or the electronic power supply is –
missing or outside permissible tolerance range.
Component not active.
Green
Flashing
light
Component active (DC link discharge via braking resistor in
progress).
–
Smart Line Module booksize compact format
Meaning of the LEDs on the Smart Line Module booksize compact
State
RDY
Description, cause
Remedy
DC LINK
Off
Off
Electronic power supply is missing or outside
permissible tolerance range.
Green
--
The component is ready for operation and cyclic DRIVE- –
CLiQ communication is taking place.
Orange
The component is ready for operation and cyclic DRIVE- –
CLiQ communication is taking place.
The DC link voltage is present.
Red
The component is ready for operation and cyclic DRIVE- Check the line voltage
CLiQ communication is taking place.
The DC link voltage is too high.
Orange
Orange
DRIVE-CLiQ communication is being established.
–
Red
--
This component has at least one fault.
Remedy and acknowledge
fault
Note:
The LED is activated regardless of whether the
corresponding messages have been reconfigured.
Green/red
(0.5 Hz)
--
Firmware is being downloaded.
–
–
Commissioning Manual
176
Commissioning Manual, (IH1), 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AF00-0BP1
Diagnostics
3.1 Diagnostics via LEDs
State
RDY
Description, cause
Remedy
DC LINK
Green/red
(2 Hz)
--
Firmware download is complete. Wait for POWER ON.
Carry out a POWER ON
Green /
orange
or
red / orange
--
Detection of the components via LED is activated
(p0124).
Note:
Both options depend on the LED state when activated
via p0124 = 1.
–
DANGER
Hazardous DC link voltages may be present at any time regardless of the state of the "DC
LINK" LED.
The warning information on the component must be carefully observed!
Commissioning Manual
Commissioning Manual, (IH1), 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AF00-0BP1
177
Diagnostics
3.1 Diagnostics via LEDs
3.1.2.8
Table 3- 22
Motor Module booksize compact format
Meaning of the LEDs on the Motor Module booksize compact
State
RDY
Description, cause
Remedy
DC LINK
Off
Off
Electronic power supply is missing or outside
permissible tolerance range.
–
Green
--
The component is ready for operation and cyclic DRIVE- –
CLiQ communication is taking place.
Orange
The component is ready for operation and cyclic DRIVE- –
CLiQ communication is taking place.
The DC link voltage is present.
Red
The component is ready for operation and cyclic DRIVE- Check the line voltage
CLiQ communication is taking place.
The DC link voltage is too high.
Orange
Orange
DRIVE-CLiQ communication is being established.
–
Red
--
This component has at least one fault.
Note:
The LED is activated regardless of whether the
corresponding messages have been reconfigured.
Remedy and acknowledge
fault
Green/red
(0.5 Hz)
--
Firmware is being downloaded.
–
Green/red
(2 Hz)
--
Firmware download is complete. Wait for POWER ON.
Carry out a POWER ON
Green /
orange
or
red/orange
--
Detection of the components via LED is activated
(p0124).
Note:
Both options depend on the LED state when activated
via p0124 = 1.
–
DANGER
Hazardous DC link voltages may be present at any time regardless of the state of the "DC
LINK" LED.
The warning information on the component must be carefully observed!
Commissioning Manual
178
Commissioning Manual, (IH1), 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AF00-0BP1
Diagnostics
3.1 Diagnostics via LEDs
3.1.2.9
Control Interface Module in the Active Line Module chassis format
Table 3- 23
Meaning of the LEDs "READY" and "DC LINK" on the Control Interface Module in the Active Line Module
Description
LED, state
Ready
DC link
Off
Off
The electronic power supply is missing or out of tolerance.
Green
Off
The component is ready for operation and cyclic DRIVE-CLiQ communication is taking
place.
Orange
The component is ready for operation and cyclic DRIVE-CLiQ communication is taking
place.
The DC link voltage is present.
Red
The component is ready for operation and cyclic DRIVE-CLiQ communication is taking
place.
The DC link voltage is too high.
Orange
Orange
DRIVE-CLiQ communication is being established.
Red
---
This component has at least one fault.
Note:
The LED is activated regardless of whether the corresponding messages have been
reconfigured.
Green / red
flashing light
0.5 Hz
---
Firmware is being downloaded.
Green / red
flashing light
2 Hz
---
Firmware download is complete. Wait for POWER ON.
Green /
orange
or
red / orange
flashing light
2 Hz
---
Component detection using LED is activated (p0124)
Table 3- 24
Note:
Both options depend on the LED state when activated via p0124 = 1.
Meaning of the LED "POWER OK" on the Control Interface Module in the Active Line Module
LED
Color
State
Description
POWER OK
Green
Off
DC link voltage < 100 V and voltage at -X9:1/2 less than 12 V.
On
The component is ready for operation.
Flashing
light
There is a fault. If the LED continues to flash after you have performed a
POWER ON, please contact your Siemens service center.
WARNING
Hazardous DC link voltages may be present at any time regardless of the state of the "DC
link" LED.
The warning information on the component must be carefully observed!
Commissioning Manual
Commissioning Manual, (IH1), 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AF00-0BP1
179
Diagnostics
3.1 Diagnostics via LEDs
3.1.2.10
Control Interface Board in the Active Line Module chassis format
Note
The description applies to Active Line Modules with order number 6SL3330–7Txxx–xAA0.
Table 3- 25
Meaning of the LEDs on the Control Interface Board in the Active Line Module
LED, state
Description
Ready
DC link
Off
Off
The electronic power supply is missing or out of tolerance.
Green
Off
The component is ready for operation and cyclic DRIVE-CLiQ communication is taking
place.
Orange
The component is ready for operation and cyclic DRIVE-CLiQ communication is taking
place.
The DC link voltage is present.
Red
The component is ready for operation and cyclic DRIVE-CLiQ communication is taking
place.
The DC link voltage is too high.
Orange
Orange
DRIVE-CLiQ communication is being established.
Red
---
This component has at least one fault.
Note:
The LED is activated regardless of whether the corresponding messages have been
reconfigured.
Green / red
flashing light
0.5 Hz
---
Firmware is being downloaded.
Green / red
flashing light
2 Hz:
---
Firmware download is complete. Wait for POWER ON.
Green /
orange
or
red / orange
flashing light
2 Hz
---
Component detection using LED is activated (p0124)
Note:
Both options depend on the LED state when activated via p0124 = 1.
WARNING
Hazardous DC link voltages may be present at any time regardless of the state of the "DC
link" LED.
The warning information on the component must be carefully observed!
Commissioning Manual
180
Commissioning Manual, (IH1), 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AF00-0BP1
Diagnostics
3.1 Diagnostics via LEDs
3.1.2.11
Control Interface Module in the Basic Line Module chassis format
Table 3- 26
Meaning of the LEDs "Ready" and "DC Link" on the Control Interface Module in the Basic Line Module
Description
LED, state
Ready
DC link
Off
Off
The electronic power supply is missing or out of tolerance.
Green
Off
The component is ready for operation and cyclic DRIVE-CLiQ communication is taking
place.
Orange
The component is ready for operation and cyclic DRIVE-CLiQ communication is taking
place.
The DC link voltage is present.
Red
The component is ready for operation and cyclic DRIVE-CLiQ communication is taking
place.
The DC link voltage is too high.
Orange
Orange
DRIVE-CLiQ communication is being established.
Red
---
This component has at least one fault.
Note:
The LED is activated regardless of whether the corresponding messages have been
reconfigured.
Green / red
flashing light
0.5 Hz
---
Firmware is being downloaded.
Green / red
flashing light
2 Hz
---
Firmware download is complete. Wait for POWER ON.
Green /
orange
or
red / orange
flashing light
2 Hz
---
Component detection using LED is activated (p0124)
Table 3- 27
Note:
Both options depend on the LED state when activated via p0124 = 1.
Meaning of the LED "POWER OK" on the Control Interface Module in the Basic Line Module
LED
Color
State
Description
POWER OK
Green
Off
DC link voltage < 100 V and voltage at -X9:1/2 less than 12 V.
On
The component is ready for operation.
Flashing
light
There is a fault. If the LED continues to flash after you have performed a
POWER ON, please contact your Siemens service center.
WARNING
Hazardous DC link voltages may be present at any time regardless of the state of the "DC
link" LED.
The warning information on the component must be carefully observed!
Commissioning Manual
Commissioning Manual, (IH1), 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AF00-0BP1
181
Diagnostics
3.1 Diagnostics via LEDs
3.1.2.12
Control Interface Board in the Basic Line Module chassis format
Note
The description applies to Basic Line Modules with order number 6SL3330–1Txxx–xAA0.
Table 3- 28
Meaning of the LEDs on the Control Interface Board in the Basic Line Module
LED, state
Description
Ready
DC link
Off
Off
The electronic power supply is missing or out of tolerance.
Green
Off
The component is ready for operation and cyclic DRIVE-CLiQ communication is taking
place.
Orange
The component is ready for operation and cyclic DRIVE-CLiQ communication is taking
place.
The DC link voltage is present.
Red
The component is ready for operation and cyclic DRIVE-CLiQ communication is taking
place.
The DC link voltage is too high.
Orange
Orange
DRIVE-CLiQ communication is being established.
Red
---
This component has at least one fault.
Note:
The LED is activated regardless of whether the corresponding messages have been
reconfigured.
Green / red
flashing light
0.5 Hz
---
Firmware is being downloaded.
Green / red
flashing light
2 Hz
---
Firmware download is complete. Wait for POWER ON.
Green /
orange
or
red / orange
flashing light
2 Hz
---
Component detection using LED is activated (p0124)
Note:
Both options depend on the LED state when activated via p0124 = 1.
WARNING
Hazardous DC link voltages may be present at any time regardless of the state of the "DC
link" LED.
The warning information on the component must be carefully observed!
Commissioning Manual
182
Commissioning Manual, (IH1), 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AF00-0BP1
Diagnostics
3.1 Diagnostics via LEDs
3.1.2.13
Control Interface Module in the Smart Line Module chassis format
Table 3- 29
Meaning of the LEDs "READY" and "DC LINK" on the Control Interface Module in the Smart Line Module
Description
LED, state
READY
DC LINK
Off
Off
The electronic power supply is missing or out of tolerance.
Green
Off
The component is ready for operation and cyclic DRIVE-CLiQ communication is taking
place.
Orange
The component is ready for operation and cyclic DRIVE-CLiQ communication is taking
place.
The DC link voltage is present.
Red
The component is ready for operation and cyclic DRIVE-CLiQ communication is taking
place.
The DC link voltage is too high.
Orange
Orange
DRIVE-CLiQ communication is being established.
Red
---
This component has at least one fault.
Note:
The LED is activated regardless of whether the corresponding messages have been
reconfigured.
Flashing light
0.5 Hz:
---
Firmware is being downloaded.
---
Firmware download is complete. Wait for POWER ON.
---
Component detection using LED is activated (p0124)
Green / red
Flashing light
2 Hz:
Green / red
Flashing light
2 Hz:
Note:
Both options depend on the LED state when activated via p0124 = 1.
Green /
orange
or
red / orange
Table 3- 30
Meaning of the LED "POWER OK" on the Control Interface Module in the Smart Line Module
LED
Color
State
Description
POWER OK
Green
Off
DC link voltage < 100 V and voltage at -X9:1/2 less than 12 V.
On
The component is ready for operation.
Flashing
light
There is a fault. If the LED continues to flash after you have performed a
POWER ON, please contact your Siemens service center.
WARNING
Hazardous DC link voltages may be present at any time regardless of the state of the "DC
LINK" LED.
The warning information on the component must be carefully observed!
Commissioning Manual
Commissioning Manual, (IH1), 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AF00-0BP1
183
Diagnostics
3.1 Diagnostics via LEDs
3.1.2.14
Control Interface Board in the Smart Line Module chassis format
Note
The description applies to Smart Line Modules with order number 6SL3330–6Txxx–xAA0.
Table 3- 31
Meaning of the LEDs on the Control Interface Board in the Smart Line Module
LED, state
Description
READY
DC LINK
Off
Off
The electronic power supply is missing or out of tolerance.
Green
Off
The component is ready for operation and cyclic DRIVE-CLiQ communication is taking
place.
Orange
The component is ready for operation and cyclic DRIVE-CLiQ communication is taking
place.
The DC link voltage is present.
Red
The component is ready for operation and cyclic DRIVE-CLiQ communication is taking
place.
The DC link voltage is too high.
Orange
Orange
DRIVE-CLiQ communication is being established.
Red
---
This component has at least one fault.
Note:
The LED is activated regardless of whether the corresponding messages have been
reconfigured.
Green / red
flashing light
0.5 Hz
---
Firmware is being downloaded.
Green / red
flashing light
2 Hz
---
Firmware download is complete. Wait for POWER ON.
Green /
orange
---
Component detection using LED is activated (p0124)
or
Note:
Both options depend on the LED state when activated via p0124 = 1.
Red / orange
flashing 2 HZ
WARNING
Hazardous DC link voltages may be present at any time regardless of the state of the "DC
LINK" LED.
The warning information on the component must be carefully observed!
Commissioning Manual
184
Commissioning Manual, (IH1), 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AF00-0BP1
Diagnostics
3.1 Diagnostics via LEDs
3.1.2.15
Control Interface Module in the Motor Module chassis format
Table 3- 32
Meaning of the LEDs "Ready" and "DC Link" on the Control Interface Module in the Motor Module
Description
LED, state
Ready
DC link
Off
Off
The electronic power supply is missing or out of tolerance.
Green
Off
The component is ready for operation and cyclic DRIVE-CLiQ communication is taking
place.
Orange
The component is ready for operation and cyclic DRIVE-CLiQ communication is taking
place.
The DC link voltage is present.
Red
The component is ready for operation and cyclic DRIVE-CLiQ communication is taking
place.
The DC link voltage is too high.
Orange
Orange
DRIVE-CLiQ communication is being established.
Red
---
This component has at least one fault.
Note:
The LED is activated regardless of whether the corresponding messages have been
reconfigured.
Green / red
flashing light
0.5 Hz
---
Firmware is being downloaded.
Green / red
flashing light
2 Hz
---
Firmware download is complete. Wait for POWER ON.
Green /
orange
or
red / orange
flashing light
2 Hz
---
Component detection using LED is activated (p0124)
Table 3- 33
Note:
Both options depend on the LED state when activated via p0124 = 1.
Meaning of the LED "POWER OK" on the Control Interface Module in the Motor Module
LED
Color
State
Description
POWER OK
Green
Off
DC link voltage < 100 V and voltage at -X9:1/2 less than 12 V.
On
The component is ready for operation.
Flashing
light
There is a fault. If the LED continues to flash after you have performed a
POWER ON, please contact your Siemens service center.
WARNING
Hazardous DC link voltages may be present at any time regardless of the state of the "DC
link" LED.
The warning information on the component must be carefully observed!
Commissioning Manual
Commissioning Manual, (IH1), 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AF00-0BP1
185
Diagnostics
3.1 Diagnostics via LEDs
3.1.2.16
Control Interface Board in the Motor Module chassis format
Note
The description applies to Motor Modules with the order number 6SL3320–1Txxx–xAA0.
Table 3- 34
Meaning of the LEDs on the Control Interface Board in the Motor Module
LED, state
Description
Ready
DC link
Off
Off
The electronic power supply is missing or out of tolerance.
Green
Off
The component is ready for operation and cyclic DRIVE-CLiQ communication is taking
place.
Orange
The component is ready for operation and cyclic DRIVE-CLiQ communication is taking
place.
The DC link voltage is present.
Red
The component is ready for operation and cyclic DRIVE-CLiQ communication is taking
place.
The DC link voltage is too high.
Orange
Orange
DRIVE-CLiQ communication is being established.
Red
---
This component has at least one fault.
Note:
The LED is activated regardless of whether the corresponding messages have been
reconfigured.
Green / red
flashing light
0.5 Hz
---
Firmware is being downloaded.
Green / red
flashing light
2 Hz
---
Firmware download is complete. Wait for POWER ON.
Green /
orange
or
red / orange
flashing light
2 Hz
---
Component detection using LED is activated (p0124)
Note:
Both options depend on the LED state when activated via p0124 = 1.
WARNING
Hazardous DC link voltages may be present at any time regardless of the state of the "DC
link" LED.
The warning information on the component must be carefully observed!
Commissioning Manual
186
Commissioning Manual, (IH1), 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AF00-0BP1
Diagnostics
3.1 Diagnostics via LEDs
3.1.2.17
Control Interface Module in the Power Module chassis format
Table 3- 35
Meaning of the LEDs "READY" and "DC LINK" on the Control Interface Module in the Power Module
Description
LED, state
READY
DC LINK
Off
Off
The electronic power supply is missing or out of tolerance.
Green
Off
The component is ready for operation and cyclic DRIVE-CLiQ communication is taking
place.
Orange
The component is ready for operation and cyclic DRIVE-CLiQ communication is taking
place.
The DC link voltage is present.
Red
The component is ready for operation and cyclic DRIVE-CLiQ communication is taking
place.
The DC link voltage is too high.
Orange
Orange
DRIVE-CLiQ communication is being established.
Red
---
This component has at least one fault.
Note:
The LED is activated regardless of whether the corresponding messages have been
reconfigured.
Flashing light
0.5 Hz:
---
Firmware is being downloaded.
---
Firmware download is complete. Wait for POWER ON.
---
Component detection using LED is activated (p0124)
Green / red
Flashing light
2 Hz:
Green / red
Flashing light
2 Hz:
Note:
Both options depend on the LED state when activated via p0124 = 1.
Green /
orange
or
red / orange
Table 3- 36
Meaning of the LED "POWER OK" on the Control Interface Module in the Power Module
LED
Color
State
Description
POWER OK
Green
Off
DC link voltage < 100 V and voltage at -X9:1/2 less than 12 V.
On
The component is ready for operation.
Flashing
light
There is a fault. If the LED continues to flash after you have performed a
POWER ON, please contact your Siemens service center.
WARNING
Hazardous DC link voltages may be present at any time regardless of the state of the "DC
LINK" LED.
The warning information on the component must be carefully observed!
Commissioning Manual
Commissioning Manual, (IH1), 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AF00-0BP1
187
Diagnostics
3.1 Diagnostics via LEDs
3.1.2.18
Control Interface Board in the Power Module chassis format
Note
The description applies to Power Modules with the order number 6SL3315–1TExx–xAA0.
Table 3- 37
Meaning of the LEDs on the Control Interface Board in the Power Module
LED, state
Description
READY
DC LINK
Off
Off
The electronic power supply is missing or out of tolerance.
Green
Off
The component is ready for operation and cyclic DRIVE-CLiQ communication is taking
place.
Orange
The component is ready for operation and cyclic DRIVE-CLiQ communication is taking
place.
The DC link voltage is present.
Red
The component is ready for operation and cyclic DRIVE-CLiQ communication is taking
place.
The DC link voltage is too high.
Orange
Orange
DRIVE-CLiQ communication is being established.
Red
---
This component has at least one fault.
Note:
The LED is activated regardless of whether the corresponding messages have been
reconfigured.
Flashing light
0.5 Hz:
---
Firmware is being downloaded.
---
Firmware download is complete. Wait for POWER ON.
---
Component detection using LED is activated (p0124)
Green / red
Flashing light
2 Hz:
Green / red
Flashing light
2 Hz:
Green /
orange
or
red / orange
Note:
Both options depend on the LED state when activated via p0124 = 1.
WARNING
Hazardous DC link voltages may be present at any time regardless of the state of the "DC
LINK" LED.
The warning information on the component must be carefully observed!
Commissioning Manual
188
Commissioning Manual, (IH1), 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AF00-0BP1
Diagnostics
3.1 Diagnostics via LEDs
3.1.3
Additional modules
3.1.3.1
Control Supply Module
Table 3- 38
Control Supply Module – description of the LEDs
LED
READY
DC LINK
Color
-
Status
off
Description, cause
Remedy
Electronics power supply is missing or outside permissible
tolerance range.
–
Green
Continuous
Component is ready to operate.
–
-
off
Electronics power supply is missing or outside permissible
tolerance range.
–
Orange
Continuous
DC link voltage within permissible tolerance range.
–
Red
Continuous
DC link voltage outside permissible tolerance range.
–
Commissioning Manual
Commissioning Manual, (IH1), 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AF00-0BP1
189
Diagnostics
3.1 Diagnostics via LEDs
3.1.3.2
Meaning of the LEDs on the Control Interface Module in the Power Module
Table 3- 39
Meaning of the LEDs "READY" and "DC LINK" on the Control Interface Module in the Power Module
Description
LED, state
READY
DC LINK
Off
Off
The electronic power supply is missing or out of tolerance.
Green
Off
The component is ready for operation and cyclic DRIVE-CLiQ communication is taking
place.
Orange
The component is ready for operation and cyclic DRIVE-CLiQ communication is taking
place.
The DC link voltage is present.
Red
The component is ready for operation and cyclic DRIVE-CLiQ communication is taking
place.
The DC link voltage is too high.
Orange
Orange
DRIVE-CLiQ communication is being established.
Red
---
This component has at least one fault.
Note:
The LED is activated regardless of whether the corresponding messages have been
reconfigured.
Flashing light
0.5 Hz:
---
Firmware is being downloaded.
---
Firmware download is complete. Wait for POWER ON.
---
Component detection using LED is activated (p0124)
Green / red
Flashing light
2 Hz:
Green / red
Flashing light
2 Hz:
Note:
Both options depend on the LED state when activated via p0124 = 1.
Green /
orange
or
red / orange
Table 3- 40
Meaning of the LED "POWER OK" on the Control Interface Module in the Power Module
LED
Color
State
Description
POWER OK
Green
Off
DC link voltage < 100 V and voltage at -X9:1/2 less than 12 V.
On
The component is ready for operation.
Flashing
light
There is a fault. If the LED continues to flash after you have performed a
POWER ON, please contact your Siemens service center.
WARNING
Hazardous DC link voltages may be present at any time regardless of the state of the "DC
LINK" LED.
The warning information on the component must be carefully observed!
Commissioning Manual
190
Commissioning Manual, (IH1), 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AF00-0BP1
Diagnostics
3.1 Diagnostics via LEDs
3.1.3.3
Meaning of the LEDs on the Control Interface Board in the Power Module
Note
The description applies to Power Modules with the order number 6SL3315–1TExx–xAA0.
Table 3- 41
Meaning of the LEDs on the Control Interface Board in the Power Module
LED, state
Description
READY
DC LINK
Off
Off
The electronic power supply is missing or out of tolerance.
Green
Off
The component is ready for operation and cyclic DRIVE-CLiQ communication is taking
place.
Orange
The component is ready for operation and cyclic DRIVE-CLiQ communication is taking
place.
The DC link voltage is present.
Red
The component is ready for operation and cyclic DRIVE-CLiQ communication is taking
place.
The DC link voltage is too high.
Orange
Orange
DRIVE-CLiQ communication is being established.
Red
---
This component has at least one fault.
Note:
The LED is activated regardless of whether the corresponding messages have been
reconfigured.
Flashing light
0.5 Hz:
---
Firmware is being downloaded.
---
Firmware download is complete. Wait for POWER ON.
---
Component detection using LED is activated (p0124)
Green / red
Flashing light
2 Hz:
Green / red
Flashing light
2 Hz:
Green /
orange
or
red / orange
Note:
Both options depend on the LED state when activated via p0124 = 1.
WARNING
Hazardous DC link voltages may be present at any time regardless of the state of the "DC
LINK" LED.
The warning information on the component must be carefully observed!
Commissioning Manual
Commissioning Manual, (IH1), 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AF00-0BP1
191
Diagnostics
3.1 Diagnostics via LEDs
3.1.3.4
Sensor Module Cabinet SMC10 / SMC20
Table 3- 42
Sensor Module Cabinet 10 / 20 (SMC10 / SMC20) – description of the LEDs
LED
RDY
READY
Color
Status
Description, cause
Remedy
-
off
Electronics power supply is missing or outside permissible
tolerance range.
–
Green
Continuous
The component is ready for operation and cyclic DRIVECLiQ communication is taking place.
–
Orange
Continuous
DRIVE-CLiQ communication is being established.
–
Red
Continuous
At least one fault is present in this component.
Remedy and
acknowledge fault
Note:
LED is driven irrespective of the corresponding messages
being reconfigured.
Green/
red
Green/
orange
or
Red/
orange
0.5 Hz
flashing
light
Firmware is being downloaded.
–
2 Hz
flashing
light
Firmware download is complete. Wait for POWER ON
Carry out a POWER
ON
Flashing
light
Component recognition via LED is activated (p0144)
–
Note:
Both options depend on the LED status when component
recognition is activated via p0144 = 1.
Commissioning Manual
192
Commissioning Manual, (IH1), 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AF00-0BP1
Diagnostics
3.1 Diagnostics via LEDs
3.1.3.5
Table 3- 43
Meaning of LEDs on the Sensor Module Cabinet-Mounted SMC30
Meaning of LEDs on the Sensor Module Cabinet SMC30
LED
RDY
READY
Color
Status
Remedy
-
Off
Electronics power supply is missing or outside permissible –
tolerance range.
Green
Continuous
light
The component is ready for operation and cyclic DRIVECLiQ communication is taking place.
–
Orange
Continuous
light
DRIVE-CLiQ communication is being established.
–
Red
Continuous
light
At least one fault is present in this component.
Remedy and
acknowledge fault
Green/
red
Flashing
0.5 Hz
Firmware is being downloaded.
–
Green/
red
Flashing
2 Hz
Firmware download is complete. Wait for POWER ON.
Carry out a POWER
ON
Green/
orange
Flashing
light
Component recognition via LED is activated (p0144).
–
or
Red/
orange
OUT > 5 V
Description, cause
Note:
The LED is activated regardless of whether the
corresponding messages have been reconfigured.
Note:
Both options depend on the LED status when component
recognition is activated via p0144 = 1.
-
Off
Electronics power supply is missing or outside permissible –
tolerance range.
Power supply ≤ 5 V.
Orange
Continuous
light
Electronics power supply for encoder system available.
Power supply > 5 V.
–
Important:
Make sure that the connected encoder can be operated
with a 24 V power supply. If an encoder that is designed
for a 5 V supply is operated with a 24 V supply, this can
destroy the encoder electronics.
Commissioning Manual
Commissioning Manual, (IH1), 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AF00-0BP1
193
Diagnostics
3.1 Diagnostics via LEDs
3.1.3.6
Table 3- 44
Communication Board CBC10 for CANopen
Meaning of the LEDs on the Communication Board CAN CBC10
LED
Color
OPT on the –
Control Unit
Status
Description, cause
Remedy
OFF
Electronics power supply is missing or outside permissible –
tolerance range.
Continuous
light
OPERATIONAL
–
Flashing
light
PREOPERATIONAL
–
Communication Board either defective or not inserted.
Green
Single flash
No PDO communication possible
STOPPED
Only NMT communication possible
Red
Continuous
light
BUS OFF
Single flash
ERROR PASSIVE MODE
Check baud rate
The error counter for "error passive" has reached the
value 127. After the SINAMICS drive system was booted
no further active CAN component was on the bus.
Check cabling
Error Control Event, a Guard Event has occurred
Check connection to
CANopen master
Double
flash
Check baud rate
Check cabling
Commissioning Manual
194
Commissioning Manual, (IH1), 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AF00-0BP1
Diagnostics
3.1 Diagnostics via LEDs
3.1.3.7
Communication Board Ethernet CBE20
Meaning of the LEDs on the CBE20 Communication Board Ethernet
Table 3- 45
Meaning of the LEDs at ports 1 to 4 of the X1400 interface
LED
Link port
Activity port
Table 3- 46
Color
Off
Electronics power supply is missing or outside permissible tolerance range (link
missing or defective).
Green
Continuous
light
A different device is connected to port x and a physical connection exists.
-
Off
Electronics power supply is missing or outside permissible tolerance range (no
activity).
Yellow
Flashing light
Data is being received or sent at port x.
Meaning of the Sync and Fault LEDs on the CBE20
Color
Status
Description
–
Off
If the link port LED is green:
The CBE20 is operating normally, data is being exchanged with the configured
IO Controller.
Red
Flashing

The response monitoring interval has elapsed.

Communications is interrupted.

The IP address is incorrect.

Incorrect or no configuration.

Incorrect parameter settings.

Incorrect or missing device name.

IO Controller not connected/switched off, although an Ethernet connection
has been established.

Other CBE20 errors
Continuous
light
Sync
Description
-
LED
Fault
Status
CBE20 bus error

No physical connection to a subnet/switch.

Incorrect transmission rate

Full duplex transmission is not activated.
–
Off
If the link port LED is green:
Control Unit task system is not synchronized with the IRT clock. An internal
substitute clock is generated.
Green
Flashing light
Control Unit task system has synchronized with the IRT clock and data is being
exchanged.
Continuous
light
Task system and MC-PLL have synchronized with the IRT clock.
Commissioning Manual
Commissioning Manual, (IH1), 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AF00-0BP1
195
Diagnostics
3.1 Diagnostics via LEDs
Table 3- 47
Meaning of the OPT LED on the Control Unit
LED
OPT
Color
–
Status
OFF
Description, cause
Electronics power supply is missing or outside permissible
tolerance range.
Remedy
–
Communication Board either defective or not inserted.
Green
Red
Continuous
light
Communication Board is ready and cyclic communication
is taking place.
–
Flashing light
0.5 Hz
The Communication Board is ready, but cyclic
communications is not running.
Possible causes:
–

At least one fault is present.

Communication is being established.
Continuous
light
Cyclic communication via PROFINET has not yet been
–
established. However, non-cyclic communications are
possible. SINAMICS waits for a parameterizing/configuring
telegram
Flashing light
0.5 Hz
The firmware update into the CBE20 has been completed
with an error.
Possible causes:

–
The CBE20 is defective.
 The memory card for the Control Unit is defective.
In this state CBE20 cannot be used.
Flashing light
2 Hz
Orange
Flashing light
0.5 Hz
There is a communications error between the Control Unit
and the CBE20.
Possible causes:

Board was withdrawn after booting.

The board is defective
Firmware is being updated.
Correctly insert the
board, if required,
replace.
–
Commissioning Manual
196
Commissioning Manual, (IH1), 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AF00-0BP1
Diagnostics
3.1 Diagnostics via LEDs
3.1.3.8
Table 3- 48
Voltage Sensing Module VSM10
Meanings of the LEDs on the Voltage Sensing Module VSM10
LED
READY
Color
Status
Description, cause
Remedy
-
OFF
Electronics power supply is missing or outside permissible –
tolerance range.
Green
Continuous
light
The component is ready for operation and cyclic DRIVECLiQ communication is taking place.
–
Orange
Continuous
light
DRIVE-CLiQ communication is being established.
–
Red
Continuous
light
At least one fault is present in this component.
Remedy and
acknowledge fault
Flashing
light 0.5 Hz
Firmware is being downloaded.
–
Flashing
light 2 Hz
Firmware download is complete. Wait for POWER ON
Carry out a POWER
ON
Component recognition via LED is activated (p0144).
–
Green/
red
Green/
orange
or
Red/
orange
Flashing
light
Note:
The LED is activated regardless of whether the
corresponding messages have been reconfigured.
Note:
Both options depend on the LED status when component
recognition is activated via p0144 = 1.
Commissioning Manual
Commissioning Manual, (IH1), 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AF00-0BP1
197
Diagnostics
3.1 Diagnostics via LEDs
3.1.3.9
Table 3- 49
DRIVE-CLiQ Hub Module DMC20
Description of the LEDs on the DRIVE-CLiQ Hub Module DMC20
LED
READY
Color
Status
Description, cause
Remedy
-
Off
Electronics power supply is missing or outside permissible –
tolerance range.
Green
Continuous
light
The component is ready for operation and cyclic DRIVECLiQ communication is taking place.
–
Orange
Continuous
light
DRIVE-CLiQ communication is being established.
–
Red
Continuous
light
At least one fault is present in this component.
Remedy and
acknowledge fault
Flashing
light 0.5 Hz
Firmware is being downloaded.
–
Flashing
light 2 Hz
Firmware download is complete. Wait for POWER ON
Carry out a POWER
ON
Component recognition via LED is activated (p0154).
–
Green/
red
Green/
orange
or
Red/
orange
Flashing
light
Note:
The LED is activated regardless of whether the
corresponding messages have been reconfigured.
Note:
Both options depend on the LED status when component
recognition is activated via p0154 = 1.
Commissioning Manual
198
Commissioning Manual, (IH1), 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AF00-0BP1
Diagnostics
3.1 Diagnostics via LEDs
3.1.4
Terminal Module
3.1.4.1
Terminal Module TM15
Table 3- 50
Meanings of the LEDs on the Terminal Module TM15
LED
READY
Color
Status
Description, cause
Remedy
-
Off
Electronics power supply is missing or outside permissible
tolerance range.
–
Green
Continuous
light
The component is ready for operation and cyclic DRIVECLiQ communication is taking place.
–
Orange
Continuous
light
DRIVE-CLiQ communication is being established.
–
Red
Continuous
light
At least one fault is present in this component.
Remedy and
acknowledge fault
Flashing
light 0.5 Hz
Firmware is being downloaded.
–
Flashing
light 2 Hz
Firmware download is complete. Wait for POWER ON
Carry out a POWER
ON
Component recognition via LED is activated (p0154).
–
Green/
red
Green/
orange
or
Red/
orange
Flashing
light
Note:
The LED is activated regardless of whether the
corresponding messages have been reconfigured.
Note:
Both options depend on the LED status when component
recognition is activated via p0154 = 1.
Commissioning Manual
Commissioning Manual, (IH1), 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AF00-0BP1
199
Diagnostics
3.1 Diagnostics via LEDs
3.1.4.2
Table 3- 51
Terminal Module TM31
Meanings of the LEDs on the Terminal Module TM31
LED
READY
Color
Status
Description, cause
Remedy
-
OFF
Electronics power supply is missing or outside permissible –
tolerance range.
Green
Continuous
light
The component is ready for operation and cyclic DRIVECLiQ communication is taking place.
–
Orange
Continuous
light
DRIVE-CLiQ communication is being established.
–
Red
Continuous
light
At least one fault is present in this component.
Remedy and
acknowledge fault
Flashing
light 0.5 Hz
Firmware is being downloaded.
–
Flashing
light 2 Hz
Firmware download is complete. Wait for POWER ON
Carry out a POWER
ON
Component recognition via LED is activated (p0154).
–
Green/
red
Green/
orange
or
Red/
orange
Flashing
light
Note:
The LED is activated regardless of whether the
corresponding messages have been reconfigured.
Note:
Both options depend on the LED status when component
recognition is activated via p0154 = 1.
Commissioning Manual
200
Commissioning Manual, (IH1), 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AF00-0BP1
Diagnostics
3.1 Diagnostics via LEDs
3.1.4.3
Table 3- 52
Terminal Module TM41
Meaning of the LEDs on the Terminal Module TM41
LED
READY
Color
Status
Remedy
-
Off
Electronics power supply is missing or outside permissible –
tolerance range.
Green
Continuous
light
The component is ready for operation and cyclic DRIVECLiQ communication is taking place.
–
Orange
Continuous
light
DRIVE-CLiQ communication is being established.
–
Red
Continuous
light
At least one fault is present in this component.
Remedy and
acknowledge fault
Flashing
light 0.5 Hz
Firmware is being downloaded.
–
Flashing
light 2 Hz
Firmware download is complete. Wait for POWER ON.
Carry out a POWER
ON
Component recognition via LED is activated (p0154).
–
Green/
red
Green/
orange
Flashing
light
or
Red/
orange
Z pulses
Description, cause
Note:
The LED is activated regardless of whether the
corresponding messages have been reconfigured.
Note:
Both options depend on the LED status when component
recognition is activated via p0154 = 1.
–
Off
Zero mark found; wait for zero marker output; OR
component switched off.
–
Red
Continuous
light
Zero mark not enabled or zero mark search.
–
Green
Continuous
light
Stopped at zero mark.
–
Flashing
light
Zero mark is output at each virtual revolution.
–
Commissioning Manual
Commissioning Manual, (IH1), 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AF00-0BP1
201
Diagnostics
3.1 Diagnostics via LEDs
3.1.4.4
Table 3- 53
Terminal Module TM54F
Meaning of the LEDs on the Terminal Module TM54F
LED
READY
Color
Status
Off
Electronics power supply is missing or outside permissible
tolerance range.
–
Green
Continuou
s light
The component is ready for operation and cyclic DRIVECLiQ communication is taking place.
–
Orange
Continuou
s light
DRIVE-CLiQ communication is being established.
–
Red
Continuou
s light
At least one fault is present in this component.
Note:
The LED is activated irrespective of whether the
corresponding messages have been reconfigured.
Remedy and
acknowledge
fault
Green/red
Flashing
light 0.5
Hz
Firmware is being downloaded.
–
Flashing
light 2 Hz
Firmware download is complete. Wait for POWER ON
Carry out a
POWER ON
Flashing
light
Component recognition via LED is activated (p0154).
–
–
ON
The controllable sensor power supply is functioning faultfree.
–
Red
Continuou
s light
There is a fault in the controllable sensor power supply.
–
–
ON
Sensor power supply is functioning fault-free.
Red
Continuou
s light
There is a fault in the sensor power supply.
or
Red/orange
L3+
Remedy
-
Green/orange
L1+, L2+,
Description, cause
Note:
Both options depend on the LED status when component
recognition is activated via p0154 = 1.
Commissioning Manual
202
Commissioning Manual, (IH1), 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AF00-0BP1
Diagnostics
3.1 Diagnostics via LEDs
LED
Color
Status
Description, cause
Remedy
Fail-safe inputs / double inputs
F_DI z
(input x,
(x+1)+,
(x+1)-)
LED
x
–
–
LED
x+1
Red
–
–
–
Red
–
LED
x
Green
LED
x+1
Green
Green
Green
Continuou
s light
–
Continuou
s light
–
Continuou
s light
Continuou
s light
NC contact / NC contact 1): (z = 0..9, x = 0, 2, ..18)
Different signal states at input x and x+1
No signal at input x and no signal at input x+1
–
NC contact / NO contact 1): (z = 0..9, x = 0, 2, ..18)
Same signal states at input x and x+1
No signal at input x and a signal at input x+1
NC contact / NC contact 1): (z = 0..9, x = 0, 2, ..18)
A signal at input x and a signal at input x+1
–
NC contact / NO contact 1): (z = 0..9, x = 0, 2, ..18)
A signal at input x and no signal at input x+1
Inputs x+1 (DI 1+, 3+, .. 19+) can be set individually via parameter p10040 (TM54F).
p10040 (TM54F) = 0: Input x+1 is an NC contact.
p10040 (TM54F) = 1: Input x+1 is NO contact.
Factory setting: p10040 (TM54F) = 0 for all inputs x+1.
1)
Single digital inputs, not fail-safe
DI x
–
Off
No signal at digital input x (x = 20..23)
–
Green
Continuou
s light
Signal at digital input x
–
Fail-safe digital outputs with associated readback channel
F_DO y
(0+..3+,
0-..3-)
Green
Continuou
s light
Output y (y=0 .. 3) carries a signal
–
Readback input DI 2y for output F_DO y (y = 0..3) at test stop.
The status of the LEDs also depends on the type of external circuit.
DI 2y
–
Off
One of the two output lines y+ or y- or both lines of output y
carry a signal
–
Green
Continuou
s light
Both output lines y+ and y- carry no signal
–
Commissioning Manual
Commissioning Manual, (IH1), 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AF00-0BP1
203
Diagnostics
3.1 Diagnostics via LEDs
3.1.4.5
Terminal Module TM120
Table 3- 54
LED
Meaning of the LEDs on the Terminal Module TM120
Color
Status
Description, cause
Remedy
-
Off
Electronics power supply is missing or outside permissible
tolerance range.
Check power supply
Green
Continuous
light
The component is ready for operation and cyclic DRIVE-CLiQ
communication is taking place.
-
Orange
Continuous
light
DRIVE-CLiQ communication is being established.
-
Red
Continuous
light
Green/
Red
Flashing
light
0.5 Hz
Firmware is being downloaded.
-
Flashing
light
2 Hz
Firmware download is complete. Wait for POWER ON
Carry out a POWER
ON
Detection of the components via LED is activated (p0154).
Note:
Both options depend on the LED status when module
recognition is activated via p0154 = 1.
-
READY
Green/
orange
or
red/
orange
Flashing
light
2 Hz
At least one fault is present in this component. Note:
Remedy and
The LED is activated regardless of whether the corresponding acknowledge fault
messages have been reconfigured.
Commissioning Manual
204
Commissioning Manual, (IH1), 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AF00-0BP1
Diagnostics
3.2 Diagnostics via STARTER
3.2
Diagnostics via STARTER
The diagnostic functions support commissioning and service personnel during
commissioning, troubleshooting, diagnostics and service activities.
Prerequisite
● Online operation of STARTER.
Diagnostic functions
The following diagnostic functions are available in STARTER:
● Specifying signals with the ramp-function generator
● Signal recording with the trace function
● Analyzing the control response with the measuring function
● Outputting voltage signals for external measuring devices via test sockets
3.2.1
Function generator
Description
The ramp-function generator can be used, for example, for the following tasks:
● To measure and optimize control loops.
● To compare the dynamic response of coupled drives.
● To specify a simple traversing profile without a traversing program.
The ramp-function generator can be used to generate different signal shapes.
In the connector output operating mode (r4818), the output signal can be injected into the
control loop via the BICO interconnection.
In servo operation and depending on the mode set, this setpoint can also be injected into the
control structure as a current setpoint, disturbing torque, or speed setpoint, for example. The
impact of superimposed control loops is automatically suppressed.
Commissioning Manual
Commissioning Manual, (IH1), 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AF00-0BP1
205
Diagnostics
3.2 Diagnostics via STARTER
Parameterizing and operating the ramp-function generator
The function generator is parameterized and operated via the STARTER commissioning
tool.
Figure 3-1
"Ramp-function generator" initial screen
Note
Please refer to the online help for more information about parameterizing and operation.
Properties
● Concurrent injection to several drives possible.
● The following parameterizable signal shapes can be set:
– Square-wave
– Staircase
– Triangular
– Sinusoidal
– PRBS (pseudo random binary signal, white noise)
● An offset is possible for each signal. The ramp-up to the offset is parameterizable. Signal
generation begins after the ramp-up to the offset.
● Restriction of the output signal to the minimum and maximum value settable.
Commissioning Manual
206
Commissioning Manual, (IH1), 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AF00-0BP1
Diagnostics
3.2 Diagnostics via STARTER
● Operating modes of the ramp-function generator for servo and vector
– Connector output
● Operating modes of the ramp-function generator (servo only)
– Current setpoint downstream of filter (current setpoint filter)
– Disturbing torque (downstream of current setpoint filter)
– Speed setpoint downstream of filter (speed setpoint filter)
– Current setpoint upstream of filter (current setpoint filter)
– Speed setpoint upstream of filter (speed setpoint filter)
Injection points of the ramp-function generator
6SHHGVHWSRLQW
XSVWUHDPRIWKH
ILOWHU
)URPWKH
LQWHUSRODWRU
Figure 3-2
6SHHGVHWSRLQW
GRZQVWUHDPRI
WKHILOWHU
6HWSRLQW
ILOWHU
&XUUHQWVHWSRLQW
XSVWUHDPRIWKH
ILOWHU
6SHHG
FRQWUROOHU
&XUUHQWVHWSRLQW
GRZQVWUHDPRI
WKHILOWHU
6HWSRLQW
ILOWHU
&XUUHQW
FRQWUROOHU
SDWK
'LVWXUELQJ
WRUTXH
Injection points of the ramp-function generator
Further signal shapes
Further signal shapes can be parameterized.
Example:
The "triangular" signal form can be parameterized with "upper limitation" to produce a
triangle with no peak.
7RS
OLPLW
7ULDQJXODU
VLJQDOIRUP
Figure 3-3
"Triangular" signal without peak
Commissioning Manual
Commissioning Manual, (IH1), 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AF00-0BP1
207
Diagnostics
3.2 Diagnostics via STARTER
Starting/stopping the ramp-function generator
CAUTION
With the corresponding ramp-function generator parameter settings (e.g. offset), the motor
can "drift" and travel to its end stop.
The movement of the drive is not monitored while the ramp-function generator is active.
To start the ramp-function generator:
1. Establish the preconditions for starting the ramp-function generator:
– Click the button:
– Select the "Function generator" tab.
or
– In the project field, under Drives, call → Drives_xy → Commissioning → Function
generator with a double click.
2. Select the operating mode e.g. speed setpoint after filter.
3. Select the drive, e.g. Drive_01.
4. Set the signal shape, for example, squarewave.
5. Click on the "Assume master control!" button.
6. Accept the "Sign-of-life monitoring" (master control button is yellow).
7. Click on the green "Drive on" button.
8. Start the function generator ("Start FctGen" button).
9. Read the"Caution" note and confirm with "Yes".
To stop the measuring function:
1. Click on the "Stop FctGen" button.
2. The drive can also be stopped by pressing the red "Drive off" button.
Parameterization
The "function generator" parameter screen is selected using the following icon in the toolbar
of the STARTER commissioning tool:
Figure 3-4
STARTER icon for "Device trace-function generator"
Commissioning Manual
208
Commissioning Manual, (IH1), 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AF00-0BP1
Diagnostics
3.2 Diagnostics via STARTER
3.2.2
Trace function
Description
The trace function can be used to record measured values over a defined period depending
on trigger conditions.
Parameterization
The "Trace" parameterizing screen is selected using the following icon in the toolbar of the
STARTER commissioning tool.
Figure 3-5
STARTER icon for "Device trace-function generator"
Parameterizing and using the trace function
The trace function is parameterized and operated via the STARTER commissioning tool.
Figure 3-6
Trace function
Commissioning Manual
Commissioning Manual, (IH1), 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AF00-0BP1
209
Diagnostics
3.2 Diagnostics via STARTER
The device cycle clock display flashes 3 times at around 1 Hz when the time slice is changed
from < 4 ms to ≥4 ms (see description under "Properties").
Note
Please refer to the online help for more information about parameterizing and operation.
Properties
● Up to 8 recording channels for each trace
When more than 4 channels per single trace are used, the trace's device clock cycle is
switched automatically from 0.125 ms (0.250 ms for vector control) to 4 ms. This action
ensures that the CU320's performance is not influenced too strongly by the trace.
● Device clock cycles of SINAMICS S120 trace for single traces:
4 channels: 0.125 ms (Servo)/0.250 ms (Vector)
8 channels: 4 ms (Servo/Vector)
● Two independent traces per Control Unit
● Endless trace
The parameter data are written to the memory until this is full.
A ring buffer can be selected in order to avoid this. If the ring buffer is active, then
STARTER automatically starts again from the beginning to write to the trace memory
after the last trace parameter was saved.
Device cycle of the SINAMICS S120 trace for an endless trace:
– 4 channels: 0.125 ms (servo)/0.250 ms (vector)
– 8 channels: 4 ms (Servo/Vector)
The time slice 4 ms may not be available due to the system condition. In this case the
next higher time slice is used.
● Triggering
– Without triggering (recording immediately after start)
– Triggering on signal with edge or on level
● STARTER commissioning tool
– Automatic or adjustable scaling of display axes
– Signal measurement via cursor
● Settable trace cycle: Integer multiples of the basic sampling time
● Averaging the trace values
If a float value with a clock cycle slower than the device cycle clock is recorded, then the
values recorded will not be averaged. This is achieved using parameter p4724.
Parameter p4724[0...1] "Trace averaging in time range" is "0" in the default setting.
Index "0" and "1" stand for both the traces each with 8 channels.
If the traced values should be averaged, then parameter p4724 should be set to "1".
Commissioning Manual
210
Commissioning Manual, (IH1), 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AF00-0BP1
Diagnostics
3.2 Diagnostics via STARTER
3.2.3
Measuring function
Description
The measuring function is used for optimizing the drive controller. By parameterizing the
measuring function, the impact of superimposed control loops can be suppressed selectively
and the dynamic response of the individual drives analyzed. The ramp-function generator
and trace function are linked for this purpose. The control loop is supplied with the rampfunction generator signal at a given point (e.g. speed setpoint) and recorded by the trace
function at another (e.g. speed actual value). The trace function is parameterized
automatically when the measuring function is parameterized. Specific predefined operating
modes for the trace function are used for this purpose.
Parameterizing and using the measuring function
The measuring function is parameterized and operated via the STARTER commissioning
tool.
Figure 3-7
"Measuring function" initial screen
Note
Please refer to the online help for more information about parameterizing and operation.
Commissioning Manual
Commissioning Manual, (IH1), 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AF00-0BP1
211
Diagnostics
3.2 Diagnostics via STARTER
Properties
● Measuring functions
– Current controller setpoint change (downstream of the current setpoint filter)
– Current controller reference frequency response (downstream of the current setpoint
filter)
– Speed controller setpoint change (downstream of the speed setpoint filter)
– Speed controller disturbance step change (fault downstream of the current setpoint
filter)
– Speed controller reference frequency response (downstream of the speed setpoint
filter)
– Speed controller reference frequency response (upstream of the speed setpoint filter)
– Speed controller interference frequency response (fault downstream of the current
setpoint filter)
– Speed controller path (excitation downstream of current setpoint filter)
Starting/stopping the measuring function
CAUTION
With the corresponding measuring function parameter settings (e.g. offset), the motor can
"drift" and travel to its end stop.
The movement of the drive is not monitored while the measuring function is active.
To start the measuring function:
1. Ensure that the prerequisites for starting the measuring function are fulfilled.
– Activate the control board.
Drives –> Drive_x –> Commissioning –> Control board
– Switch on the drive.
Control board –> Activate enable signals –> Switch on
2. Select the drive (as control board).
3. Set the measuring function.
e.g. current controller setpoint change
4. Load the settings to the target system ("Download parameterization" button).
5. Start the ramp-function generator ("Start measuring function" button)
To stop the measuring function:
● "Stop measuring function" button
Commissioning Manual
212
Commissioning Manual, (IH1), 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AF00-0BP1
Diagnostics
3.2 Diagnostics via STARTER
Parameterization
The "Measurement function" parameterizing screen form is selected via the following icon in
the toolbar of the STARTER commissioning tool.
Figure 3-8
3.2.4
STARTER icon for "Measuring function"
Measuring sockets
Description
The measuring sockets are used to output analog signals. Any interconnectable signal can
be output to any measuring socket on the Control Unit.
CAUTION
The measuring sockets should be used for commissioning and servicing purposes only.
56
The measurements may only be carried out by properly trained specialist personnel.
0HDVXULQJ
VRFNHWV
7
7
Figure 3-9
;
0HDVXULQJVRFNHW
7
0
CU310-2 DP/PN measuring sockets, CU320-2 DP/PN measuring sockets
View from front View from below
Commissioning Manual
Commissioning Manual, (IH1), 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AF00-0BP1
213
Diagnostics
3.2 Diagnostics via STARTER
Parameterizing and using the measuring sockets
The measuring sockets are parameterized and operated via the STARTER commissioning
tool.
Figure 3-10
"Measuring sockets" initial screen
Commissioning Manual
214
Commissioning Manual, (IH1), 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AF00-0BP1
Diagnostics
3.2 Diagnostics via STARTER
Note
Please refer to the online help for more information about parameterizing and operation.
Properties
 Resolution
8-bit
 Voltage range
0 V to +4.98 V
 Measuring cycle
Depends on the measuring signal
(e.g. actual speed value in speed controller cycle 125 μs)
Short-circuit-proof
Parameterizable scaling
Adjustable offset
Adjustable limitation
Signal chart for measuring sockets
The signal characteristic for measuring sockets is shown in function diagram 8134 (see
SINAMICS S120/S150 List Manual).
Which signal can be output via measuring sockets?
The signal to be output via a measuring socket is specified by parameterizing the connector
input p0771[0...2].
Important measuring signals (examples):
r0060
CO: Speed setpoint before speed setpoint filter
r0063
CO: Actual speed value
r0069[0...2]
CO: Phase currents actual value
r0075
CO: Field-generating current setpoint
r0076
CO: Field-generating actual current
r0077
CO: Torque-generating current setpoint
r0078
CO: Torque-generating actual current
Scaling
Scaling specifies how the measuring signal is processed. A straight line with 2 points must
be defined for this purpose.
Example:
x1 / y1 = 0.0% / 2.49 V x2 / y2 = 100.0% / 4.98 V (default setting)
Commissioning Manual
Commissioning Manual, (IH1), 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AF00-0BP1
215
Diagnostics
3.2 Diagnostics via STARTER
– 0.0% is mapped onto 2.49 V
– 100.0% is mapped onto 4.98 V
– 100.0% is mapped onto 0.00 V
Offset
The offset is applied additively to the signal to be output. The signal to be output can thus be
displayed within the measuring range.
Limitation
● Limitation On
If signals are output outside the permissible measuring range, the signal is limited to 4.98
V or to 0V.
● Limitation off
The output of signals outside the permissible measuring range causes a signal overflow.
In the event of an overflow, the signal jumps from 0 V to 4.98 V or from 4.98 to 0 V.
Example of a measurement
Assumption:
The actual speed (r0063) is to be output for a drive via measuring socket T1.
How do you do it?
1. Connect and set the measuring device.
2. Interconnect the signal (e.g. STARTER).
Interconnect the connector input (CI) belonging to the measuring socket with the desired
connector output (CO).
CI: p0771[1] = CO: r0063
3. Parameterize the signal characteristic (scaling, offset, limitation).
Function diagrams (see SINAMICS S120/S150 List Manual)
● 8134 measuring sockets
Overview of important parameters (see SINAMICS S120/S150 List Manual)
Adjustable parameters
● p0771[0...2] CI: Measuring sockets signal source
● p0777[0...2] Measuring sockets characteristic value x1
● P0778[0...2] Measuring sockets characteristic value y1
Commissioning Manual
216
Commissioning Manual, (IH1), 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AF00-0BP1
Diagnostics
3.3 Diagnostic buffer
● p0779[0...2] Measuring sockets characteristic value x2
● p0780[0...2] Measuring sockets characteristic value y2
● p0783[0...2] Measuring sockets offset
● p0784[0...2] Measuring sockets limit on/off
Display parameters
● r0772[0...2] Measuring sockets output signal
● r0774[0...2] Measuring sockets output voltage
● r0786[0...2] Measuring sockets normalization per volt
3.3
Diagnostic buffer
Description
A diagnostic buffer mechanism has already been implemented in the SIMATIC S7
environment. It can record important operational events in the automation system as a kind
of log book (restriction: The availability of the diagnostics buffer mechanism is also
dependent on the hardware release of the Control Unit).
The diagnostic buffer is in the non-volatile memory, so data written to it can be read out for
subsequent analysis of a malfunction (including pre-history).
The essential events recorded in the buffer are:
● Faults
● Important changes to the boot status (end status) and partial booting of DOs
● Commissioning procedures
● State change of PROFIBUS/PROFINET communication
● Exceptions
The entries in the diagnostic buffer can be called up via the drive unit properties (symbol in
project navigator --> right mouse-click) under the menu option Target device --> Device
diagnostics.
Note
STEP7 Full version
The STARTER device diagnostics function is displayed only when you have installed the full
version of STEP7.
Commissioning Manual
Commissioning Manual, (IH1), 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AF00-0BP1
217
Diagnostics
3.3 Diagnostic buffer
Events recorded by the diagnostic buffer
The following list shows the entries defined for SINAMICS drive units. Additional information
is marked with <>.
Faults
An entry is defined for each possible DO number. The fault code and fault value are entered
in the additional information.
Example:
Fault DO 5: Fault code 1005 fault value 0x30012
Alarms are not recorded in the diagnostic buffer. Propagated faults (faults which are signaled
to all DOs) are only stored in the diagnostic buffer once.
Commissioning Manual
218
Commissioning Manual, (IH1), 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AF00-0BP1
Diagnostics
3.3 Diagnostic buffer
Booting procedures and booting status changes
In principle, only start and completion are recorded for booting procedures. Booting status
(see r3988) are only recorded when an end status arises that can only be exited by user
action (r3988 = 1, 10, 200, 250, 325, 370, 800). Booting statuses and booting status
changes are:
● POWER ON
● Error in booting (r3988 = 1)
● Fatal error in booting (r3988 = 10)
● Waiting for first commissioning (r3988 = 200)
● Topology error in booting (r3988 = 250)
● Waiting for entry of drive type (r3988 = 325)
● Waiting until p0009 = 0 is set (r3988 = 370)
● Boot status r3988 = <state at which 670 or 680> reached
● Booting finished, cyclic operation
● Reason for new boot < 0 = Internal reason; 1 = Warm start; 2 = Booting from saved data;
3 = Booting after download>
● Drive reset via p0972 = <Mode>
● Partial booting DO started <DO number>
● Partial booting DO <DO number> finished
Commissioning procedures
● Device commissioning: New status p0009 = <new value p0009>
● Commissioning DO <DO number>: New status p0010 = <new value p0010>
● Ram2Rom DO <0 for all DOs> started
● Ram2Rom DO <0 for all DOs> completed
● Project download started
● DO <DO_Number> deactivated
● DO <DO_Number> reactivated
● Component <Component number> deactivated
● Component <Component number> reactivated
● Power Off/ Power On required after firmware update (DO <DO number>
Component < Component number >)
● DO <DO-No> deactivated and not available
● Component <component number> deactivated and not available
Commissioning Manual
Commissioning Manual, (IH1), 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AF00-0BP1
219
Diagnostics
3.3 Diagnostic buffer
Communication (PROFIBUS, PROFINET, ...)
● PZD <IF1 or IF2> cyclic data exchange started
● PZD <IF1 or IF2> cyclic data exchange completed
● Changeover to UTC time for operating hours count status <Days> <Milliseconds>
● Time correction (correct) by <correction value> seconds
Exceptions
Exceptions can be taken from the crash diagnostics already available in the new boot run.
The exceptions are always entered into the diagnostic buffer first, even before the entry
"POWER ON".
● Data Abort Exception Address: <Content Program Counter>
● Floating Point Exception Address: <Content Program Counter>
● Prefetch Abort Exception Address: <Content Program Counter>
● Exception type <Type coding> Info: <Info depends on type>
Treatment of the time stamp
After successful time synchronization (in cyclic operation), the UTC time is used as a time
stamp. Up until this time (POWER ON and switching to UTC time) the operating hours
counter is used for all entries. The UTC time is entered for following entries.
Commissioning Manual
220
Commissioning Manual, (IH1), 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AF00-0BP1
Diagnostics
3.4 Diagnostics of uncommissioned axes
3.4
Diagnostics of uncommissioned axes
Description
To be able to identify uncommissioned drive objects of the classes "Infeeds", "Motor
Module", "SERVO" and "VECTOR", there is an operating display in parameter r0002.
● r0002 "Infeed operating display" = 35: Carry out the first start-up
● r0002 "Drive operating display" = 35: Carry out the first start-up
The parameter r0002 "drive operating display" = 35 is then displayed if p3998[D]=0 is in any
data set. Parameter p3998 specifies whether the first commissioning of the drive is still to be
carried out (0 = yes, 2 = no).
Parameter p3998 is set to the value 2 when the calculation of the motor and control
parameters for all data sets has been completed without errors (see r3925 bit0 = 1) and the
encoder selection p0400 is not at 10100 (encoder identification).
The limitation that all drive data sets (DDS) must be commissioned in order to exit
commissioning is ensured by checking the parameters involved (see also F07080 in the
SINAMICS S120/S150 List Manual).
Infeeds
An infeed (Active Line Modules, Basic Line Modules or Smart Line Modules with DRIVECLiQ) is considered commissioned when the line voltage and line frequency have been
parameterized with appropriate values. A basic setting of 50 Hz or 60 Hz is expected for the
line frequency.
The line voltage p0210 may need to be adjusted to the existing power supply.
To exit the state r0002 "Infeed operating display" = 35, set parameter p3900 "completion of
quick commissioning" to the value 3, after any necessary adjustment to the line voltage.
For a 400 V unit, for example, the voltage p0210 is always initialized with 400 V. Although it
is possible to switch on when connected to all line supplies from 380 V - 480V, operation is
not always optimal and/or alarm messages are displayed (see SINAMICS S120/S150 List
Manual).
If the unit is not connected to a 400V line supply, then the rated voltage p0210 should be
adjusted. This can also be done after the first time the unit is switched on, by setting p0010 =
1.
Motor Module SERVO and VECTOR
A drive is considered to have been commissioned when valid data is in the motor and
encoder data sets assigned to every drive data set (DDS):
● Motor data sets (MDS):
p0131, p0300, p0301 etc. (see SINAMICS S120/S150 List Manual)
● Encoder data sets (EDS):
p0141, p0142, p0400 etc. (see SINAMICS S120/S150 List Manual)
After parameterizing the motor and encoder data via quick commissioning
(p0010 = 1 ->0) use p3900 "completion of quick commissioning" > 0 to exit.
Commissioning Manual
Commissioning Manual, (IH1), 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AF00-0BP1
221
Diagnostics
3.4 Diagnostics of uncommissioned axes
If commissioning should not be run using quick commissioning, the motor data should be
entered via p0010 = 3 (p0340[0...n] "Automatic calculation of motor/control parameters" =1)
after entering the rating plate data, and after that the encoder data entered via p0010 = 4.
If the above conditions are not met, in r0002 of the drive concerned the value r0002 = 35:
"Carry out first commissioning" is shown.
It is not taken into account whether BICO sources like, for example:
● p0840 "BI: ON/OFF1" or
● p0864 "BI: Infeed operation"
needed for switching on (pulse enable) have already been parameterized or are still at the
value 0.
If, after commissioning all DDSs, parameter p0010 is set once more to a value greater than
0, in r0002 the value r0002 = 46: "Switching on inhibited - exit the commissioning mode
(p0009, p0010)" will be displayed.
The drive has been commissioned, but no pulse can be enabled.
Note on p0010 = 1 (quick commissioning):
Quick commissioning with p3900 > 0 (when p0010 = 1) works for all DDSs where motor and
encoder data have been entered.
This means that if quick commissioning is carried out a second or third time (or more),
previously calculated and possibly user-adjusted data will be overwritten or recalculated.
For this reason we recommend carrying out any subsequent commissioning of a certain
DDS (e.g. changing the motor), specifically using p0010 = 3 and p0010 = 4 instead of
p0010 = 1.
Commissioning Manual
222
Commissioning Manual, (IH1), 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AF00-0BP1
Diagnostics
3.4 Diagnostics of uncommissioned axes
Example
The image below shows a diagram of the diagnostic performance of uncommissioned
infeeds and drives. A configuration with one power unit (DO2) and respectively two DDSs,
MDSs and EDSs has been assumed. DO1 represents the CU.
The unit has already been commissioned.
The number of data sets and the components assigned to the DO2 have already been
entered and the data set allocated.
32:(521
'2S ''6DQG''62."
'2S!
RU
'2S 1R
&DUU\RXWILUVWFRPPLVVLRQLQJRIGULYH
'2U '2U DQG'2S!
<HV
'2S!
RU
'2S 6HW5HDG\IRUSRZHUXS212)) '2U '2U DQG'2S '2S!
3RZHURQGLVDEOHH[LWFRPPLVVLRQLQJPRGH
SS'2U '2U DQG'2S!
Figure 3-11
Diagnostics of uncommissioned axes
Commissioning Manual
Commissioning Manual, (IH1), 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AF00-0BP1
223
Diagnostics
3.5 Fault and alarm messages
3.5
Fault and alarm messages
3.5.1
General information about faults and alarms
Description
The errors and states detected by the individual components of the drive system are
indicated by messages.
The messages are categorized into faults and alarms.
Note
The individual faults and alarms are described in the SINAMICS S120/S150 List Manual in
the chapter "Faults and Alarms". Function diagrams for the fault buffer, alarm buffer, fault
trigger and fault configuration are also contained in the Section "Function diagrams" ->
"Faults and alarms".
Properties of faults and alarms
● Faults
– Are identified by Fxxxxx.
– Can lead to a fault reaction.
– Must be acknowledged once the cause has been remedied.
– Status via Control Unit and LED RDY.
– Status via PROFIBUS status signal ZSW1.3 (fault active).
– Entry in the fault buffer.
● Alarms (code A56789)
– Are identified by Axxxxx.
– Have no further effect on the drive.
– The alarms are automatically reset once the cause has been remedied. No
acknowledgement is required.
– Status via PROFIBUS status signal ZSW1.7 (alarm active).
– Entry in the alarm buffer.
Commissioning Manual
224
Commissioning Manual, (IH1), 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AF00-0BP1
Diagnostics
3.5 Fault and alarm messages
● General properties of faults and alarms
– Can be configured (e.g. change fault to alarm, fault reaction).
– Triggering on selected messages possible.
– Initiation of messages possible via an external signal.
– Contains the component number for identifying the SINAMICS component involved
– Contains diagnostic information on the message involved
Acknowledgement of faults
The list of faults and alarms specifies how each fault is acknowledged after the cause has
been remedied.
1. Acknowledgement of faults by "POWER ON"
– Switch the drive on/off (POWER ON)
– Press the RESET button on the Control Unit
2. Acknowledgement of faults by "IMMEDIATE"
– Via PROFIBUS control signal
STW1.7 (reset fault memory): 0/1 edge
Set STW1.0 (ON/OFF1) = "0" and "1"
– Via external input signal
Binector input and interconnection with digital input
p2103 = "Requested signal source"
p2104 = "Requested signal source"
p2105 = "Requested signal source"
Across all of the drive objects (DO) of a Control Unit
p2102 = "Requested signal source"
3. Acknowledge faults with "PULSE INHIBIT"
– The fault can only be acknowledged with a pulse inhibit (r0899.11 = 0).
– The same possibilities are available for acknowledging as described under
acknowledge IMMEDIATELY.
Note
The drive can only resume operation after all active faults have been acknowledged.
Commissioning Manual
Commissioning Manual, (IH1), 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AF00-0BP1
225
Diagnostics
3.5 Fault and alarm messages
3.5.2
Buffer for faults and alarms
Note
A fault and alarm buffer is provided for each drive. The drive and device-specific messages
are entered in this buffer.
The contents of the fault buffer are saved to non-volatile memory when the Control Unit is
powered down, i.e. the fault buffer history is still available when the unit is powered up again.
NOTICE
The entry in the fault/alarm buffer is made after a delay. For this reason, the fault/alarm
buffer should not be read until a change in the buffer is also recognized (r0944, r2121) after
"Fault active"/"Alarm active" is output.
Commissioning Manual
226
Commissioning Manual, (IH1), 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AF00-0BP1
Diagnostics
3.5 Fault and alarm messages
Fault buffer
Faults which occur are entered in the fault buffer as follows:
)DXOWFRGH
)DXOWWLPH
)DXOWYDOXH UHFHLYHG
'ULYHREMHFW
IDXOW
)DXOWWLPH
UHVROYHG WULJJHULQJ
&RPSRQHQW 'LDJQRVLV
QXPEHU
DWWULEXWHV
)DXOW
)DXOW
)DXOW
r0945[0]
r0949[0] [I32]
r2133[0] [Float]
r0948[0] [ms]
r2130[0] [ d]
r2109[0] [ ms]
r2136[0] [d]
r3115[0]
r3120[0]
r3122[0]
)DXOW
r0945[1]
r0949[1] [I32]
r2133[1] [Float]
r0948[1] [ms]
r2130[1] [ d]
r2109[1] [ ms]
r2136[1] [d]
r3115[7]
r3120[7]
r3122[7]
)DXOW
r0945[7]
r0949[7] [I32]
r2133[7] [Float]
r0948[7] [ms]
r2130[7] [ d]
r2109[7] [ ms]
r2136[7] [d]
r3115[7] <1>
r3120[7]<1>
r3122[7]<1>
)DXOW
r0945[8]
r0949[8] [I32]
r2133[8] [Float]
r0948[8] [ms]
r2130[8] [ d]
r2109[8] [ ms]
r2136[8] [d]
r3115[8]
r3120[8]
r3122[8]
r0945[9]
r0949[9] [I32]
r2133[9] [Float]
r0948[9] [ms]
r2130[9] [ d]
r2109[9] [ ms]
r2136[9] [d]
r3115[9]
r3120[9]
r3122[9]
&XUUHQW
LQFLGHQW
)DXOW
VWDFNQRZ
OHGJHG
LQFLGHQW
)DXOW
r0945[15]
r0949[15] [I32] r0948[15] [ms]
r2133[15] [ Float] r2130[15] [d]
r2109[15] [ms]
r2136[15] [d]
r3115[15]
r3120[15]
r3122[15]
)DXOW
r0945[56]
r0949[56] [I32] r0948[56] [ms]
r2133[56] [ Float] r2130[56] [d]
r2109[56] [ms]
r2136[56] [d]
r3115[56]
r3120[56]
r3122[56]
)DXOW
r0945[57]
r0949[57] [I32] r0948[57] [ms]
r2133[57] [ Float] r2130[57] [d]
r2109[57] [ms]
r2136[57] [d]
r3115[57]
r3120[57]
r3122[57]
)DXOW
r0945[63]
r0949[63] [I32] r0948[63] [ms]
r2133[63] [ Float] r2130[63] [d]
r2109[63] [ms]
r2136[63] [d]
r3115[63]
WKDFNQRZ
OHGJHG
LQFLGHQW
>ROGHVW@
r3120[63]
r3122[63]
! 7KLVIDXOWLVRYHUZULWWHQE\PRUHUHFHQWIDXOWVH[FHSW6DIHW\IDXOWV
Figure 3-12
Structure of the fault buffer
Properties of the fault buffer:
● A new fault incident encompasses one or more faults and is entered in "Current fault
incident".
● The entries are arranged in the buffer according to the time at which they occurred.
● If a new fault incident occurs, the fault buffer is reorganized. The history is recorded in
"Acknowledged fault incident" 1 to 7.
● If the cause of at least one fault in "Current fault incident" is remedied and acknowledged,
the fault buffer is reorganized. Faults that have not been remedied remain in "Current
fault incident".
● If "Current fault incident" contains eight faults and a new fault occurs, the fault in the
parameters in index 7 is overwritten by the new fault.
Commissioning Manual
Commissioning Manual, (IH1), 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AF00-0BP1
227
Diagnostics
3.5 Fault and alarm messages
● r0944 is incremented each time the fault buffer changes.
● A fault value (r0949) can be output for a fault. The fault value is used to diagnose the fault
more accurately; please refer to the fault description for details of the meaning.
Clearing the fault buffer
● The fault buffer is reset as follows: p0952 = 0
Alarm buffer, alarm history
The alarm buffer comprises the alarm code, the alarm value and the alarm time (received,
resolved). The alarm history occupies the last indices ([8...63]) of the parameter.
$ODUPFRGH
$ODUPYDOXH
$ODUPWLPH
UHFHLYHG
$ODUPWLPH
UHVROYHG
&RPSRQHQW
QXPEHU
:DUQLQJ
'LDJQRVLV
DWWULEXWHV
:DUQLQJ
$ODUP
ROGHVW
U>@
U>@>O@
U>@>)ORDW@
U>@>PV@
U>@>G@
U>@>PV@
U>@>G@
U>@
U>@
$ODUP
U>@
U>@>O@
U>@>)ORDW@
U>@>PV@
U>@>G@
U>@>PV@
U>@>G@
U>@
U>@
$ODUP
PRVWUHFHQW
U>@
U>@>O@
U>@>)ORDW@
U>@>PV@
U>@>G@
U>@>PV@
U>@>G@
U>@
U>@
$ODUPKLVWRU\
$ODUP
PRVWUHFHQW
U>@
U>@>O@
U>@>)ORDW@
U>@>PV@
U>@>G@
U>@>PV@
U>@>G@
U>@
U>@
$ODUP
U>@
U>@>O@
U>@>)ORDW@
U>@>PV@
U>@>G@
U>@>PV@
U>@>G@
U>@
U>@
$ODUP
ROGHVW
U>@
U>@>O@ U>@>PV@ U>@>PV@
U>@>)ORDW@ U>@>G@
U>@>G@
U>@
U>@
Figure 3-13
Structure of alarm buffer
Alarms that occur are entered in the alarm buffer as follows:
A maximum of 64 alarms are displayed in the alarm buffer:
● Index 0 .. 6: The first 7 alarms are displayed.
● Index 7: The most recent alarm is displayed.
A maximum of 56 alarms are displayed in the alarm history:
● Index 8: The most recent alarm is displayed.
● Index 9 .. 63: The first 55 alarms are displayed.
Commissioning Manual
228
Commissioning Manual, (IH1), 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AF00-0BP1
Diagnostics
3.5 Fault and alarm messages
Properties of the alarm buffer/alarm history:
● The arrangement in the alarm buffer is made after the time that they occurred from 7 to 0.
In the alarm history, this is from 8 to 63.
● If 8 alarms have been entered into the alarm buffer, and a new alarm is received, then the
alarms that have been resolved are transferred into the alarm history.
● r2121 is incremented each time the alarm buffer changes.
● An alarm value (r2124) can be output for an alarm. The alarm value is used to diagnose
the alarm more accurately; please refer to the alarm description for details of the
meaning.
Deleting the alarm buffer, index [0...7]:
● The alarm buffer index [0...7] is reset as follows: p2111 = 0
Commissioning Manual
Commissioning Manual, (IH1), 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AF00-0BP1
229
Diagnostics
3.5 Fault and alarm messages
3.5.3
Configuring messages
The properties of the faults and alarms in the drive system are permanently defined.
The following can be configured for some of the messages within a permanently defined
framework for the drive system:
Change message type (example)
Select message
Set message type
p2118[5] = 1001
p2119[5]
= 1: Fault (F)
= 2: Alarm (A)
= 3: No message (N)
Change fault reaction (example)
Select message
Set fault response
p2100[3] = 1002
p2101[3]
= 0: None
= 1: OFF1
= 2: OFF2
= 3: OFF3
= 4: STOP1 (available soon)
= 5: STOP2
= 6: IASC/DC brake
Internal armature short-circuit braking or
DC brake
= 7: ENCODER (p0491)
Change acknowledgement (example)
Select message
Set acknowledgement
p2126[4] = 1003
p2127[4]
= 1: POWER ON
= 2: IMMEDIATELY
= 3: PULSE INHIBIT
19 message types per drive object can be changed.
Note
If BICO interconnections exist between drive objects, all interconnected objects must be
configured.
 Example:
The TM31 has BICO interconnections with drives 1 and 2, and F35207 is to be
reconfigured as an alarm.
– p2118[n] = 35207 and p2119[n] = 2
– This must be set for TM31 and drives 1/2.
Commissioning Manual
230
Commissioning Manual, (IH1), 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AF00-0BP1
Diagnostics
3.5 Fault and alarm messages
Note
Only those messages which are listed in the indexed parameters can be changed as
desired. All other message settings retain their factory settings or are reset to the factory
settings.
Examples:
 In the case of messages listed via p2128[0...19], the message type can be changed. The
factory setting is set for all other messages.
 The fault response of fault F12345 has been changed via p2100[n]. The factory settings
are to be restored.
– p2100[n] = 0
Triggering on messages (example)
Select message
Trigger signal
p2128[0] = 1001
BO: r2129.0
or
p2128[1] = 1002
BO: r2129.1
Note
The value from CO: r2129 can be used as group trigger.
CO: r2129 = 0 No selected message has been output.
CO: r2129 > 0 Group trigger.
At least one selected message has been output.
The individual binector outputs BO: r2129 should be investigated.
Triggering messages externally
If the appropriate binector input is interconnected with an input signal, fault 1, 2 or 3 or alarm
1, 2 or 3 can be triggered via an external input signal.
Once an external fault (1 to 3) has been triggered on the Control Unit drive object, this fault
is also present on all associated drive objects. If one of these external faults is triggered on a
different drive object, it is only present on that particular drive object.
BI: p2106
––> External fault 1
––> F07860(A)
BI: p2107
––> External fault 2
––> F07861(A)
BI: p2108
––> External fault 3
––> F07862(A)
BI: p2112
––> External alarm 1
––> A07850(F)
BI: p2116
––> External alarm 2
––> A07851(F)
BI: p2117
––> External alarm 3
––> A07852(F)
Commissioning Manual
Commissioning Manual, (IH1), 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AF00-0BP1
231
Diagnostics
3.5 Fault and alarm messages
Note
An external fault or alarm is triggered by a 1/0 signal.
An external fault and alarm do not usually mean that an internal drive message has been
generated. The cause of an external fault and warning should, therefore, be remedied
outside the drive.
3.5.4
Parameters and function diagrams for faults and alarms
Function diagrams (see SINAMICS S120/S150 List Manual)
● 1710 Overview diagram – monitoring functions, faults, alarms
● 8060 Diagnostics - Fault buffer
● 8065 Diagnostics - Alarm buffer
● 8070 Diagnostics - Fault/alarm trigger word r2129
● 8075 Diagnostics - Fault/alarm configuration
Overview of important parameters (see SINAMICS S120/S150 List Manual)
● r0944 Counter for fault buffer changes
...
● p0952 Fault counter
● p2100[0...19] Fault code for fault reaction selection
...
● r2139 Status word for faults
● r3120[0...63] Component number fault
● r3121[0...63] Component number alarm
● r3122[0...63] Diagnostics attribute fault
● r3123[0...63] Diagnostics attribute alarm
Commissioning Manual
232
Commissioning Manual, (IH1), 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AF00-0BP1
Diagnostics
3.5 Fault and alarm messages
3.5.5
Forwarding of faults
Forwarding of CU faults
When faults are triggered on the drive object of the CU, it is always assumed that central
functions of the drive unit are affected. For this reason, these faults are not only signaled on
the drive object of the CU, but may also be forwarded to all other drive objects (propagation).
The fault reaction affects the drive object of the CU and all other drive objects. This behavior
also applies to the faults set in a DCC chart on the CU with the aid of DCB STM.
A fault that is set on the drive object of the CU must be acknowledged on all drive objects to
which this fault was forwarded. In this way, the fault is then automatically acknowledged on
the drive object of the CU. Alternatively all faults of all drive objects can also be
acknowledged on the CU.
Alarms are not forwarded to other drive objects by the CU.
Example
Drive object faults are only transferred to the drives, i.e. a fault on a TB30 stops the drive however, a fault on the drive does not stop the TB30.
Forwarding of faults due to BICO interconnections
If two or more drive objects are connected via BICO interconnections, then faults from drive
objects, type CU, TB30, DMC20, TM31, TM15, TM17, TM15DIDO, TM54F_MA, TM54F_SL
and CU_LINK are transferred to drive objects, type BIC, SERVO, VECTOR, TM41. There is
no forwarding of faults within these two groups of drive object types.
This behavior also applies to the faults set in a DCC chart on the above drive object types
with the aid of DCB STM.
Commissioning Manual
Commissioning Manual, (IH1), 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AF00-0BP1
233
Diagnostics
3.5 Fault and alarm messages
3.5.6
Alarm classes
Fault and alarm classes
There are differentiated alarm messages in the cyclic telegrams between the former alarm
classes "Alarm" and "Fault".
The alarm classes have been extended to give 3 additional levels of alarm between the
"pure" alarm and the fault.
The function permits higher-level control (SIMATIC, SIMOTION, SINUMERIK, etc.) to have
different control reactions to alarm messages from the drive.
The new statuses act as alarms for the drive, therefore there is NO immediate reaction from
the drive (like for the former level "alarm").
Information on alarm classes are described in status word ZSW2 at bit positions bit 5 - 6 (for
SINAMICS) or bit 11-12 (SIMODRIVE 611) (see also "ZSW2" in the chapter "Cyclic
Communication" for PROFIdrive communication in /FH1/SINAMICS S120 Function Manual
Drive Functions).
ZSW2: Valid for SINAMICS Interface Mode p2038=0 (function diagram 2454)
Bit 5 - 6 Alarm classes alarms
= 0: Alarm (former alarm level)
= 1: Alarm class A alarms
= 2: Alarm class B alarms
= 3: Alarm class C alarms
ZSW2: Valid for SIMODRIVE 611 Interface Mode p2038=1 (function diagram 2453)
Bit 11 - 12 Alarm classes alarms
= 0: Alarm (former alarm level)
= 1: Alarm class A alarms
= 2: Alarm class B alarms
= 3: Alarm class C alarms
These attributes for differentiating the alarms are implicitly assigned to the appropriate alarm
numbers. The reaction to the existing alarm classes in the alarm is defined by the user
program in the higher-level control.
Commissioning Manual
234
Commissioning Manual, (IH1), 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AF00-0BP1
Diagnostics
3.6 Troubleshooting for encoders
Explanations of the alarm classes
● Alarm class A: Drive operation currently not limited
– e.g. alarm when measurement systems inactive
– no limitation on current movement
– Prevent possible switching to the defective measuring system
● Alarm class B: Time-limited operation
– e.g. prewarning temperature: without further action the drive may need to be switched
off
– After a timer stage -> additional fault
– after exceeding a switch-off threshold -> additional fault
● Alarm class C: Functionally limited operation
– e.g. reduced voltage/current/torque/speed limits (i2t)
– e.g. continue with reduced accuracy / resolution
– e.g. continue without encoder
3.6
Troubleshooting for encoders
If an encoder fault is present, it can be acknowledged separately according to encoder
channels in a PROFIdrive telegram via the encoder interface (Gn_STW.15) or the drive
interface of the appropriate DO.
Sample configuration: 2-encoder system
● Encoder G1 motor measurement system
● Encoder G2 direct measurement system
Case considered:
All encoders signal encoder faults.
● The errors are entered in the encoder interface - and from there into the encoder channel
n of the PROFIDRIVE telegram. Bit15 of the encoder status word (Gn_ZSW.15 = 1).
● The faults are transferred to the drive DO.
● Motor measuring system faults set the drive DO to fault (ZSW1 bit3), the faults are
additionally signaled via the drive interface. An entry is made in fault buffer p0945. The
parameterized fault reaction is initiated internally.
● The direct measuring system faults are re-addressed as alarms via the appropriate drive
DO and signaled via the drive interface (ZSW1 bit7). An entry is made in alarm buffer
r2122.
No drive reactions are initiated.
Commissioning Manual
Commissioning Manual, (IH1), 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AF00-0BP1
235
Diagnostics
3.6 Troubleshooting for encoders
352),'5,9(WHOHJUDP
'ULYHFKDQQHO
A
A
FA
FA
(QFRGHU
FKDQQHO
F
FA
(QFRGHU
FKDQQHO
F
F
F
$ODUPKDQGOHU
F
F
DO
)DXOWZLWKDFNQRZOHGJHPHQW
UHFWLILHG
F
6HQVRU0RGXOH
G1
(QFRGHU PRWRUPHDVXULQJV\VWHP
Figure 3-14
F
6HQVRU0RGXOH
G2
(QFRGHU GLUHFWPHDVXUHPHQWV\VWHP
Encoder fault handling
Alarm A:
The alarm is canceled immediately, if the encoder fault was able to be acknowledged.
Faults F:
The fault remains active at the drive object until it is acknowledged via the cyclic interface.
Commissioning Manual
236
Commissioning Manual, (IH1), 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AF00-0BP1
Diagnostics
3.6 Troubleshooting for encoders
Cyclic acknowledgment
Acknowledgment using the encoder interface (Gn_STW.15)
The following responses are possible:
● The encoder is set to fault-free if faults are no longer active. The fault bit in the encoder
interface is acknowledged. The evaluation modules indicate RDY LED = green after
acknowledgment.
This behavior is valid for all encoders connected via the encoder interface, irrespective of
the measuring system type (via motor or direct).
● If the fault is still present, or if other faults are present, the acknowledgment is not
successful - and the highest priority fault (can be the same or another fault entry) is
transferred via the encoder interface.
The RDY LED on the evaluation modules is continuously red.
This behavior is valid for all encoders connected via the encoder interface, irrespective of
the measuring system type (motor or direct).
● The drive object is not detected via the encoder interface. Faults set in the drive object
remain, the drive does not even start with the encoder which in the meantime is fault-free.
The drive object must also be acknowledged via the drive interface (fault memory
RESET).
Note
The possibility to acknowledge directly via the encoder interface is especially important in
the event that "free encoder assignment" is used.
If an encoder on the drive side is assigned a certain drive X, but on the NC side a
completely different axis Y, then for this parameterized coupling, a fault cannot be
completely reset – i.e. acknowledged – using a fault memory reset (acknowledge drive).
Drive X, which is waiting for a fault memory reset, does not receive one from the NC. On
the other hand, drive Y receives a fault memory reset, but cannot execute this.
Acknowledgment using the drive interface (STW1.7 (cyclic) or p3981(acyclic))
The following responses are possible:
● If no more errors are present, the encoder is set to fault free and the fault bit in the drive
interface is acknowledged. The evaluation modules indicate RDY LED = green.
Acknowledgment takes place on all encoders that are logically assigned to the drive.
● If the fault is still present, or other faults are present, then the acknowledgment is not
successful; the next, highest priority fault is transferred via the drive interface and also via
the encoder interface involved.
● The RDY LED on the evaluation modules is continuously red.
● The encoder interfaces of the assigned encoders are NOT reset by acknowledgement at
the drive interface; the set faults remain.
● The encoder interfaces must also be acknowledged via the corresponding encoder
control word Gn_STW.15.
Commissioning Manual
Commissioning Manual, (IH1), 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AF00-0BP1
237
Diagnostics
3.6 Troubleshooting for encoders
Commissioning Manual
238
Commissioning Manual, (IH1), 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AF00-0BP1
A
Appendix
A.1
Availability of hardware components
Table A- 1
Hardware components available as of 03.2006
No.
HW component
Order number
Version
Revisions
1
AC Drive (CU320, PM340)
refer to the Catalog
new
2
SMC30
6SL3055-0AA00-5CA1
with SSI support
3
DMC20
6SL3055-0AA00-6AAx
new
4
TM41
6SL3055-0AA00-3PAx
new
5
SME120
SME125
6SL3055-0AA00-5JAx
6SL3055-0AA00-5KAx
new
6
BOP20
6SL3055-0AA00-4BAx
new
7
CUA31
6SL3040-0PA00-0AAx
new
Table A- 2
Hardware components available as of 08.2007
No.
HW component
Order number
Version
Revisions
1
TM54F
6SL3055-0AA00-3BAx
new
2
Active Interface Module
(booksize)
6SL3100-0BExx-xABx
new
3
Basic Line Module (booksize)
6SL3130-1TExx-0AAx
new
4
DRIVE-CLiQ encoder
6FX2001-5xDxx-0AAx
new
5
CUA31
Suitable for Safety Extended
Functions PROFIsafe (dbSI1)
and TM54 (dbSI2)
6SL3040-0PA00-0AA1
new
6
CUA32
6SL3040-0PA01-0AAx
new
7
SMC30 (30 mm wide)
6SL3055-0AA00-5CA2
new
Commissioning Manual
Commissioning Manual, (IH1), 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AF00-0BP1
239
Appendix
A.1 Availability of hardware components
Table A- 3
Hardware components available as of 10.2008
No.
HW component
Order number
Version
Revisions
1
TM31
6SL3055-0AA00-3AA1
new
2
TM41
6SL3055-0AA00-3PA1
new
3
DME20
6SL3055-0AA00-6ABx
new
4
SMC20 (30 mm wide)
6SL3055-0AA00-5BA2
new
5
Active Interface Module
booksize 16 kW
6SL3100-0BE21-6ABx
new
6
Active Interface Module
booksize 36 kW
6SL3100-0BE23-6ABx
new
7
Smart Line Modules booksize
compact
6SL3430-6TE21-6AAx
new
8
Motor Modules booksize
compact
6SL3420-1TE13-0AAx
6SL3420-1TE15-0AAx
6SL3420-1TE21-0AAx
6SL3420-1TE21-8AAx
6SL3420-2TE11-0AAx
6SL3420-2TE13-0AAx
6SL3420-2TE15-0AAx
new
9
Power Modules blocksize liquid
cooled
6SL3215-1SE23-0AAx
6SL3215-1SE26-0AAx
6SL3215-1SE27-5UAx
6SL3215-1SE31-0UAx
6SL3215-1SE31-1UAx
6SL3215-1SE31-8UAx
new
10
Reinforced DC link busbars for
50 mm components
6SL3162-2DB00-0AAx
new
11
Reinforced DC link busbars for
100 mm components
6SL3162-2DD00-0AAx
new
Table A- 4
Hardware components available as of 11.2009
No.
HW component
Order number
Version
Revisions
1
CU320-2 DP
6SL3040-1MA00-0AA1
4.3
new
2
TM120
6SL3055-0AA00-3KA0
4.3
new
3
SMC10 (30 mm wide)
6SL3055-0AA00-5AA3
4.3
new
Commissioning Manual
240
Commissioning Manual, (IH1), 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AF00-0BP1
Appendix
A.1 Availability of hardware components
Table A- 5
No.
Hardware components available as of 01.2011
HW component
Order number
Version
Revisions
1
CU320-2 PN
6SL3040-1MA01-0AA0
4.4
–
2
CU310-2 PN
6SL3040-1LA01-0AA0
4.4
new
3
CU310-2 DP
6SL3040-1LA00-0AA0
4.4
new
4
Braking Module Booksize
Compact
6SL3100-1AE23-5AA0
4.4
new
5
SLM 55kW Booksize
6TE25-5AAx
4.4
new
6
TM120 evaluation of up to four
motor temperature sensors
6SL3055-0AA00-3KAx
4.4
new
Commissioning Manual
Commissioning Manual, (IH1), 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AF00-0BP1
241
Appendix
A.2 List of abbreviations
A.2
List of abbreviations
Commissioning Manual
242
Commissioning Manual, (IH1), 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AF00-0BP1
Appendix
A.2 List of abbreviations
Commissioning Manual
Commissioning Manual, (IH1), 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AF00-0BP1
243
Appendix
A.2 List of abbreviations
Commissioning Manual
244
Commissioning Manual, (IH1), 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AF00-0BP1
Appendix
A.2 List of abbreviations
Commissioning Manual
Commissioning Manual, (IH1), 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AF00-0BP1
245
Appendix
A.2 List of abbreviations
Commissioning Manual
246
Commissioning Manual, (IH1), 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AF00-0BP1
Appendix
A.2 List of abbreviations
Commissioning Manual
Commissioning Manual, (IH1), 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AF00-0BP1
247
Appendix
A.2 List of abbreviations
Commissioning Manual
248
Commissioning Manual, (IH1), 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AF00-0BP1
Appendix
A.2 List of abbreviations
Commissioning Manual
Commissioning Manual, (IH1), 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AF00-0BP1
249
Appendix
A.2 List of abbreviations
Commissioning Manual
250
Commissioning Manual, (IH1), 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AF00-0BP1
Appendix
A.2 List of abbreviations
6,1$0,&6GRFXPHQWDWLRQRYHUYLHZ
*HQHUDOGRFXPHQWDWLRQFDWDORJV
6,1$0,&6
*
'
,QYHUWHU&KDVVLV8QLWV
N:WRN:
6,1$0,&6
*
*
6,027,21
6,1$0,&6
6
6,1$0,&6
6
6
30
'
'ULYH&RQYHUWHU&KDVVLV8QLWV 6,027,216,1$0,&66DQG
'ULYH&RQYHUWHU&DELQHW8QLWV 0RWRUVIRU3URGXFWLRQ0DFKLQHV
'
6,1$0,&66&KDVVLV8QLWV
&KDVVLV)RUPDW8QLWVDQG&DELQHW0RGXOHV
6,1$0,&66
&RQYHUWHU&DELQHW8QLWV
0DQXIDFWXUHUVHUYLFHGRFXPHQWDWLRQ
6,1$0,&6
*
*HWWLQJ6WDUWHG
2SHUDWLQJ,QVWUXFWLRQV
/LVW0DQXDO
6,1$0,&6
6,1$0,&6
*
*
*
2SHUDWLQJ,QVWUXFWLRQV
/LVW0DQXDO
*HWWLQJ6WDUWHG
2SHUDWLQJ,QVWUXFWLRQV
+DUGZDUH,QVWDOODWLRQ0DQXDO
)XQFWLRQ0DQXDO6DIHW\,QWHJUDWHG
/LVW0DQXDO
6,1$0,&6
2SHUDWLQJ,QVWUXFWLRQV
/LVW0DQXDO
6,1$0,&6
*0
60
*/
6/
2SHUDWLQJ,QVWUXFWLRQV
/LVW0DQXDO
0DQXIDFWXUHUVHUYLFHGRFXPHQWDWLRQ
6,1$0,&6
6
(TXLSPHQW0DQXDO
*HWWLQJ6WDUWHG
)XQFWLRQ0DQXDO
/LVW0DQXDO
6,1$0,&6
6,1$0,&6
6
6
*HWWLQJ6WDUWHG
&RPPLVVLRQLQJ0DQXDO
&RPPLVVLRQLQJ0DQXDOIRU&$1RSHQ
)XQFWLRQ0DQXDO'ULYH)XQFWLRQV
)XQFWLRQ0DQXDO6DIHW\,QWHJUDWHG
)XQFWLRQ0DQXDO'&&
/LVW0DQXDO
6,1$0,&6
6
(TXLSPHQW0DQXDOIRU&RQWURO8QLWVDQG
2SHUDWLQJ,QVWUXFWLRQV
$GGLWLRQDO&RPSRQHQWV
/LVW0DQXDO
(TXLSPHQW0DQXDOIRU%RRNVL]H3RZHU8QLWV
(TXLSPHQW0DQXDOIRU&KDVVLV3RZHU8QLWV
(TXLSPHQW0DQXDOIRU&KDVVLV/LTXLG
&RROHG3RZHU8QLWV
(TXLSPHQW0DQXDO&DELQHW0RGXOHV
(TXLSPHQW0DQXDO$&'ULYH
0DQXIDFWXUHUVHUYLFHGRFXPHQWDWLRQ
6,1$0,&6
0RWRUV
'2&RQ&'
&RQILJXUDWLRQ0DQXDOV
0RWRUV
(0&
&RQILJXUDWLRQ*XLGHOLQHV
Commissioning Manual
Commissioning Manual, (IH1), 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AF00-0BP1
251
Appendix
A.2 List of abbreviations
Commissioning Manual
252
Commissioning Manual, (IH1), 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AF00-0BP1
Index
A
Acknowledgment, 225
Actual position value format
2-pole resolver, 150
Alarm buffer, 228
Alarm classes
Faults and alarms, 234
Alarm history, 228
Alarm value, 228
Alarms, 224
Alarm buffer, 228
Alarm history, 228
configure, 230
B
Blocksize
PM, 17
Booksize
Booksize power unit, 15
BOP20
Control word, drive, 76
Important functions, 65, 77
C
Chassis, 16
Commissioning
Checklist, 15
Checklist blocksize, 17
Checklist booksize, 15
Checklist chassis, 16
with STARTER, 53
Control Unit CU320-2 DP
LEDs after booting, 161
LEDs during booting, 160
Control Unit CU320-2 PN
LEDs after booting, 164
LEDs during booting, 163
D
DDS
Drive data set, 221
Diagnosis
using LEDs on Control Supply Module, 189
using LEDs on Sensor Module Cabinet 10, 192
using LEDs on Sensor Module Cabinet 20, 192
Diagnostic buffer, 217
Diagnostic function, 205
Function generator, 205
Measuring sockets, 213
Diagnostics via LEDs
Active Line Modules, 171
Basic Line Modules, 172
Braking Module Booksize, 176
Communication Board CBC10, 194
Communication Board CBE20, 195
Control Unit CU310-2 DP, 166
Control Unit CU320-2 DP, 161
Control Unit CU320-2 PN, 164
DRIVE-CLiQ Hub Module DMC20, 198
Motor Module booksize compact, 178
Motor Modules, 175
Sensor Module Cabinet SMC30, 193
Smart Line Module Booksize Compact, 176
Smart Line Modules 16 kW and higher, 174
Smart Line Modules 5 kW and 10 kW, 173
Terminal Module TM120, 204
Terminal Module TM15, 199
Terminal Module TM31, 200
Terminal Module TM41, 201
Terminal Module TM54F, 202
Voltage Sensing Module VSM10, 197
Drive interface, 235, 237
DRIVE-CLiQ
Wiring rules, 20
DRIVE-CLiQ encoder, 128
E
EDS
Encoder data set, 221
Encoder
Configuration, 122
Linear, 127
Rotary, 126
Troubleshooting, 235
User-defined, 125
Encoder evaluation, 147
Encoder interface, 235, 237
Commissioning Manual
Commissioning Manual, (IH1), 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AF00-0BP1
253
Index
Encoder selection, 120
Encoder types, 147
EPOS
Absolute encoder adjustment, 150
F
Fault buffer, 227
Fault value, 227
Faults, 234
Acknowledgement, 225
configure, 230
Fault buffer, 227
Faults and alarms
Alarm classes, 234
BICO interconnections, 233
Forwarding, 233
Propagation, 233
Function generator, 205
Properties, 206
G
Generator for signals, 205
I
Initialization
Initializing the interface, 59
Internal Ethernet interface
LAN interface, 56
K
KTY 84, 138
L
Learning devices, 119
LEDs
Active Line Modules, 171
Basic Line Modules, 172172
Basic Line Modules, 172172
Basic Line Modules, 172172
Basic Line Modules, 172172
Braking Module Booksize, 176
Communication Board CBC10, 194
Communication Board CBE20, 195
Control Unit CU310-2 DP, 166
Control Unit CU320-2 DP, 161
Control Unit CU320-2 PN, 164
DRIVE-CLiQ Hub Module DMC20, 198
Motor Module booksize compact, 178
Motor Modules, 175
on Control Supply Module, 189
on Sensor Module Cabinet 10, 192
on Sensor Module Cabinet 20, 192
Power Modules, 187, 188, 190, 191
Sensor Module Cabinet SMC30, 193
Smart Line Module Booksize Compact, 176176
Smart Line Modules, 174
Smart Line Modules 16 kW and higher, 174
Smart Line Modules 5 kW and 10 kW, 173
Terminal Module TM120, 204
Terminal Module TM15, 199
Terminal Module TM31, 200
Terminal Module TM41, 201
Terminal Module TM54F, 202
Voltage Sensing Module VSM10, 197
Line protection, 16
Power unit, 16
M
MDS
Motor data set, 221
Measuring sockets, 213
Messages, 224
configure, 230
External triggering, 231
Motor Modules
Parallel connection commissioning, 114, 116
Motor temperature monitoring
Motor temperature, 16
N
Number of controllable drives
Notes, 39
O
Online operation with STARTER, 55, 60
P
Parameterization
using the BOP, 65
Parameterize
with STARTER, 53
Commissioning Manual
254
Commissioning Manual, (IH1), 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AF00-0BP1
Index
Parameterizing the internal LAN interface, 60
Internal LAN interface, 60
Position tracking
2-pole resolver, 150
Power units
Parallel connection commissioning, 114, 116
Preface, 3
PROFIBUS
Components, 18
Propagation, 233
Controlling the trace function, 209
Signal recording, 205
Trace function properties, 210
W
Wiring rules
DRIVE-CLiQ, 20
R
Ramp-up with partial topology, 35
Resolver
2-pole, 150
S
Setting the IP address, 57
Signal recording with the trace function, 205
SINAMICS Support Package, 120
Singleturn absolute encoder, 150
Sockets for measurement, 213
SSI encoder, 146
SSP, 120
STARTER, 53
Important functions, 53
Online operation via PROFIBUS, 55
Online operation via PROFINET, 60
Status display
Uncommissioned drive objects, 221
T
T0, T1, T2, 213
Temperature monitoring
Temperature monitoring circuit, 16
Temperature sensors
SINAMICS components, 151
Temp-F, 138
Thermal motor protection
Safe electrical separation, 140
SME12x, 138
TM120, 140
Time stamp, 220
Tools
STARTER, 53
Trace, 208
Trace function
Call trace function, 209
Commissioning Manual
Commissioning Manual, (IH1), 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AF00-0BP1
255
Siemens AG
Industry Sector
Drive Technologies
Motion Control Systems
P.O. Box 3180
91050 ERLANGEN
GERMANY
Subject to change without prior notice
© Siemens AG 2011
www.siemens.com/motioncontrol